• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Tantra
  • Tantra Collection
  • Unexcelled Yoga tantras
  • Toh 431

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh431.pdf

ཁྲོ་བོ་ཆེན་པོའི་རྒྱུད།

The Tantra of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa
Sanskrit Text

Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantram
དཔལ་གཏུམ་པོ་ཁྲོ་བོ་ཆེན་པོའི་རྒྱུད་ཀྱི་རྒྱལ་པོ་དཔའ་བོ་གཅིག་པ་ཞེས་བྱ་བ།
dpal gtum po khro bo chen po’i rgyud kyi rgyal po dpa’ bo gcig pa zhes bya ba
The Glorious Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa Tantra “The Sole Hero”
Ekalla­vīrākhya­śrī­caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantram

Toh 431

Degé Kangyur, vol. 80 (rgyud ’bum, nga), folios 304.b–343.a

ᴛʀᴀɴsʟᴀᴛᴇᴅ ɪɴᴛᴏ ᴛɪʙᴇᴛᴀɴ ʙʏ
  • Trakpa Gyaltsen

Imprint

84000 logo

Translated by the Dharmachakra Translation Committee
under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha

First published 2016

Current version v 2.28.25 (2025)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Warning: Readers are reminded that according to Vajrayāna Buddhist tradition there are restrictions and commitments concerning tantra. Practitioners who are not sure if they should read this translation are advised to consult the authorities of their lineage. The responsibility for reading this text or sharing it with others who may or may not fulfill the requirements lies in the hands of readers.

Tantra Text Warning

Readers are reminded that according to Vajrayāna Buddhist tradition there are restrictions and commitments concerning tantra.

Practitioners who are not sure if they should read translations in this section are advised to consult the authorities of their lineage.

The responsibility for reading these texts or sharing them with others—and hence the consequences—lies in the hands of readers.

About unrestricted access

The decision to publish tantra texts without restricted access has been considered carefully. First of all, it should be noted that all the original Tibetan texts of the Kangyur, including those in this Tantra section, are in the public domain. Some of the texts in this section (but by no means all of them) are nevertheless, according to some traditions, only studied with authorization and after suitable preliminaries.

It is true, of course, that a translation makes the content accessible to a far greater number of people; 84000 has therefore consulted many senior Buddhist teachers on this question, and most of them felt that to publish the texts openly is, on balance, the best solution. The alternatives would be not to translate them at all (which would defeat the purposes of the whole project), or to place some sort of restriction on their access. Restricted access has been tried by some Buddhist book publishers, and of course needs a system of administration, judgment, and policing that is either a mere formality, or is very difficult to implement. It would be even harder to implement in the case of electronic texts—and even easier to circumvent. Indeed, nowadays practically the whole range of traditionally restricted Tibetan Buddhist material is already available to anyone who looks for it, and is all too often misrepresented, taken out of context, or its secret and esoteric nature deliberately vaunted.

84000’s policy is to present carefully authenticated translations in their proper setting of the whole body of Buddhist sacred literature, and to trust the good sense of the vast majority of readers not to misuse or misunderstand them. Readers are reminded that according to Vajrayāna Buddhist tradition there are restrictions and commitments concerning tantra. Practitioners who are not sure if they should read translations in this section are advised to consult the authorities of their lineage. The responsibility, and hence consequences, of reading these texts and/or sharing them with others who may or may not fulfill the requirements lie in the hands of readers.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 2.24pm on Monday, 17th February 2025 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh431.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgments
i. Introduction
tr. The Translation
+ 25 chapters- 25 chapters
1. Introduction
2. The Maṇḍala
3. Empowerment
4. Deity
5. Mantra
6. Completion Stage
7. Revitalizing the Body
8. Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa’s Nature
9. Meditation
10. In Praise of Women
11. The Universality of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa
12. Mantra Rituals
13. Conduct
14. The Name Acala
15. Purities
16. Dependent Origination
17. Increasing the Semen
18. Preventing Disease
19. Retention of Semen and Similar Practices
20. Mantras and Yantras
21. Magical Practices
22. Controlling Prāṇa
23. Signs of Death
24. Nature of the Body
25. Deity Practice
c. Colophon
ap. Sanskrit Text
+ 25 chapters- 25 chapters
app. Prologue to the Sanskrit Text
ap1. Chapter A1
ap2. Chapter A2
ap3. Chapter A3
ap4. Chapter A4
ap5. Chapter A5
ap6. Chapter A6
ap7. Chapter A7
ap8. Chapter A8
ap9. Chapter A9
ap10. Chapter A10
ap11. Chapter A11
ap12. Chapter A12
ap13. Chapter A13
ap14. Chapter A14
ap15. Chapter A15
ap16. Chapter A16
ap17. Chapter A17
ap18. Chapter A18
ap19. Chapter A19
ap20. Chapter A20
ap21. Chapter A21
ap22. Chapter A22
ap23. Chapter A23
ap24. Chapter A24
ap25. Chapter A25
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· Tibetan Manuscript of the Root Text
· Sanskrit Manuscripts of the Root Text
· Manuscripts of the Commentary
· Secondary Sources
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

Written around the tenth or the eleventh century ᴄᴇ, in the late Mantra­yāna period, The Tantra of Caṇḍa­mahāroṣaṇa represents the flowering of the Yoginī­tantra genre. The tantra offers instructions on how to attain the wisdom state of Buddha Caṇḍa­mahāroṣaṇa through the practice of the four joys. The tantra covers a range of practices and philosophical perspectives of late tantric Buddhism, including the development stage, the completion stage, the use of mantras, and a number of magical rites and rituals. The text is quite unique with its tribute to and apotheosis of women and, in this regard, probably has few parallels anywhere else in world literature. It is written in the spirit of great sincerity and devotion, and it is this very spirit that mitigates, and at the same time empowers, the text’s stark imagery and sometimes shocking practices. This text certainly calls for an open mind.


ac.

Acknowledgments

ac.­1

This translation was produced by Dharmachakra Translation Committee under the supervision of Chökyi Nyima Rinpoche. Wiesiek Mical translated the text from the Sanskrit manuscripts, prepared the Sanskrit edition, and wrote the introduction. The translation was then compared against the Tibetan translation found in the Degé Kangyur by James Gentry, and edited by Andreas Doctor.

The Dharmachakra Translation Committee is also indebted to Professor Harunaga Isaacson and Dr. Péter Szántó for their help in obtaining facsimiles of some of the manuscripts, and to Professor Isaacson for making available some of his personal materials.

This translation has been completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

Like most Buddhist tantras, the Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantra (CMT) is regarded within the Vajrayāna tradition as a divinely revealed text, with its teachings delivered directly from the level of the saṃbhogakāya, that is, the bliss body of Lord Buddha. In such tantras, the saṃbhogakāya deity who delivers the original discourse varies‍—it could be Avalokiteśvara, Vajrapāṇi, or others. In this case, it is Lord Vajrasattva. The teaching itself takes the form of a dialogue between Vajrasattva and his consort. Lord Vajrasattva here assumes the identity of the deity Acala (Immovable One), which is another name for the deity of the title, Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa (Fierce Great Angry One). His consort is Vajra­dhātvīśvarī (Goddess of the Vajra Realm).


Text Body

The Translation
The Tantra of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa

1.
Chapter 1

Introduction

[F.304.b]


1.­1

Oṁ, homage to Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa!


Thus did I hear at one time. Lord Vajrasattva dwelt within the bhaga of the goddess of the Vajra Realm, which is the essence of body, speech, and mind of all tathāgatas. He dwelt there together with many hosts of vajra yogins and yoginīs, namely: White Acala vajra yogin, Yellow Acala vajra yogin, Red Acala vajra yogin, Green Acala vajra yogin, Delusion Vajrī vajra yoginī, Calumny Vajrī vajra yoginī, Passion Vajrī vajra yoginī, and Envy Vajrī vajra yoginī. He dwelt there with trillions of yogins and yoginīs, headed by those just mentioned.


2.
Chapter 2

The Maṇḍala

2.­1

Then the blessed Hatred Vajrī tightly embraced Lord Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa and said:

“What is the size of the maṇḍala,
And with what materials should it be drawn?
And also, what is to be written in its center?
Tell me, O lord!”
2.­2

The lord then said:

“The size of the maṇḍala
Should be one cubit, two cubits,
Three cubits, four or five‍—
But not more than five cubits in measure.
2.­3
“It should be made with powders of whatever substances
And of different colors,
With four corners, four doors,
And adorned with four archways.

3.
Chapter 3

Empowerment

3.­1

Then the goddess said:

“How should the student be prepared,
And how should he be engaged in this tantra?
How are his doubts resolved?
Please explain this, O great lord!”
3.­2

The lord then said:

“First one should give him the triple refuge,
The five disciplines, and the fast.
Then the five empowerments,
The secret empowerment, and lastly the wisdom-consort empowerment.
3.­3
“Then the disciple will be fit.
One should explain this tantra to him alone;
One should keep others far away,
Otherwise one will go to Raurava Hell.

4.
Chapter 4

Deity

4.­1

Then the goddess said:

“How should he meditate,
The meditator on Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa?
What mantra should he recite?
Please tell me, O great lord!”
4.­2

The lord then said:

“In a place pleasing to the mind
And free from all distractions,
One whose mind is in equipoise
Should prepare a pleasant seat.
4.­3
“First one should cultivate loving kindness;
Second, compassion;
Third, sympathetic ‌joy;
And, to complete the lot, ‌equanimity.
4.­4
“Then one should visualize the seed syllable in one’s heart,
Standing on the sun, which is on the moon, which is on the lotus.
One should visualize Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa in front,
Arisen from light rays of the seed syllable.

5.
Chapter 5

Mantra

5.­1

“Now I will teach the complete collection of mantras.” So saying, the lord entered the absorption called Victory over All Māras, and presented the collection of mantras.

“The root mantra: Oṁ, Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa, hūṁ phaṭ!36
The second root mantra: Oṁ, Acala, hūṁ phaṭ!37
The third root mantra: Oṁ hūṁ phaṭ!
The heart mantra: Hūṁ
The second heart mantra: Āṁ
The third heart mantra: Haṁ.
5.­2

“The garland mantra:

“Oṁ hrāṁ hrīṁ hrauṁ, in your fierce form, expel, expel! Drive away, drive away! Pull, pull! Shake, shake! Blow up, blow up! Strike, strike! Swallow, swallow! Bind, bind! Crush, crush! Paralyze, paralyze! Delude, delude! Bind the mouths of all the enemies, bind! Frighten off all the ḍākinīs, grahas, bhūtas, piśācas, vyādhis, yakṣas, frighten! Kill, kill! Order death, order! O Rurucaṇḍaruk, protect such and such, protect! The general of a fierce army orders all this. Oṁ, Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa, hūṁ phaṭ!38


6.
Chapter 6

Completion Stage

6.­1

Then the goddess Prajñāpāramitā embraced the lord tightly, rubbing her lotus against his vajra, and said:

“How should one meditate
According to the practice of the completion stage?
Please elaborate on this question
For the good of the yoginīs.”
6.­2

The lord then said:

“Immersed in the practice of the completion stage
And wholly devoted to his practice, a yogin
Should visualize my form,
With one-pointed mind, day and night.
6.­3
“He should visualize his woman [F.311.b]
In your form, incisively.
Through intensive practice like this,
He will achieve mastery.

7.
Chapter 7

Revitalizing the Body

7.­1

Then the goddess said:

“The fatigue of any person practicing
Sexual intercourse would be great.
Please deign to explain, O lord,
For everybody’s sake, how to remove this fatigue.”
7.­2

The lord said:

“When one has noticed, with one’s own senses,
That the pleasure given by the woman has died out,
One should eat fish and meat,
And drink wine, being focused.
7.­3
“Other food too, as available,
Boiled grain66 and so on, milk and water.
First he should give to the woman,
And eat only what has been left by her.

8.
Chapter 8

Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa’s Nature

8.­1

Then the lord made full prostrations to the goddess and said: [F.316.a]

“How should a yogin
Perceive your form, dear?
And by what means should the goddess
Be honored by the yogins?”
8.­2

The goddess then said:

“Whenever a female form is seen
In the world of the three abodes,
It should be regarded as my form,
Be it of low or respectable family.
8.­3
“A goddess or demigoddess,
Or a yakṣiṇī, a rākṣasī,
A nāginī, a bhūtinī,
A kinnarī, or a human girl,
8.­4
“A gandharvī, even a female hell-being,
A she-animal, a female hungry ghost,
A woman from the priestly, warrior, or merchant caste,
Or a peasant woman, or one of endless other groups,

9.
Chapter 9

Meditation

9.­1

Then the goddess said, “How, O lord, should the wisdom and the means, the woman and the man, cultivate their identification with the deities?”

The lord said:

“A yogin should place the woman in front
And look deeply in her eyes.
He should make his body straight
And meditate with one-pointed mind.
9.­2
“Because of the nature of the four bodies,
There is no separation, not even in the slightest.
However, without understanding,
A distinction is perceived between wisdom and means.

10.
Chapter 10

In Praise of Women

10.­1

Then the goddess said, “Is it possible, O lord, to attain the level of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa even without a woman? [F.318.b] Or is it not possible?”

The lord replied, “It is not possible, O goddess.”

The goddess said, “Is it impossible, O lord, because bliss does not arise?”

The lord said:

“The highest awakening is not attained
Merely by the arising of bliss.
Only by the arising of a particular kind of bliss
Can it be reached, not otherwise.

11.
Chapter 11

The Universality of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa

11.­1

Then the blessed lady said, “Are you, O lord, with or without passion?”

The blessed lord said:

“I am everyone, and I pervade everything,
Creating everything and destroying everything.
I possess all forms, I am the awakened one;
I am the creator, the destroyer, a powerful lord full of bliss.
11.­2
“Through whatever form
Beings may be guided,
In that very form, I abide
For the benefit of the world.
11.­3
“Sometimes I am the Buddha, sometimes a siddha,
Sometimes the Dharma, sometimes the Saṅgha,
Sometimes a hungry ghost, sometimes an animal,
Sometimes I assume the form of a hell being.

12.
Chapter 12

Mantra Rituals

12.­1

Then the blessed lady said:

“Please explain about applying mantras‍—
The pacifying and the enriching;
The practices of enthralling and summoning;
The killing, the driving away, and so forth.
12.­2
“The removing of poison, the removing of disease,
The stopping of a fire or a sword.
Also the victory in battle
And the most eminent scholarship.
12.­3
“The sādhana of yakṣiṇīs that inducts them into service,
The sādhanas of dūtas and bhūtas‍—
These skills and arts of many types‍—
Please explain them to me, O lord, with a firm motive.”

13.
Chapter 13

Conduct

13.­1

The goddess then said:

“What conduct should be followed by a yogin?
Tell me, O lord!
And what practice ought to be done?
By what means is accomplishment speedily attained?”
13.­2

The lord said:

“Killed should be the evil ones‍—
Those who disparage the Buddha’s teaching.
Having seized their wealth,
One should perform the benefit of beings. [F.325.a]
13.­3
“All widows should indeed be attended upon;
Female ascetics, one’s mother or daughter.
One should consume fish and meat,
And drink wine, in a state of mental equilibrium.

14.
Chapter 14

The Name Acala

14.­1

Then in that gathering, a vajra yogin called Samantabhadra said this to the Blessed One, “May I ask, O lord, why do we use the names Acala (Immovable), as well as Ekallavīra (Sole Hero) and Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa (Great Fierce Angry One)?”

The Blessed One replied:

“Because of the union of wisdom and skillful means,
It is immovable and by nature blissful.
It is the wisdom and skillful means itself,
And therefore cannot be swayed by dispassion.

15.
Chapter 15

Purities

15.­1

Then the blessed lady, Delusion Vajrī, said, “How can Sole Hero be actualized? Tell me, O supreme lord!” [F.327.a]

The lord then said:

“Starting from the syllable ā,
One should instantly visualize Black Acala.
Then, merely by the power of stability,
The yogin will certainly become a buddha.
15.­2
“One should meditate on White Acala,
Or the yellow one, or the red one.
Or one should meditate on the green one,
Embraced by Hatred Vajrī, and so forth.
15.­3
“One should visualize him alone,
Assuming him to be the central figure among the five Acalas.
The wisdom should belong to his spiritual family,
Or alternatively one should visualize her as being from another spiritual family.

16.
Chapter 16

Dependent Origination

16.­1

Then the Blessed Lady said:

“How does the world come into being?
How does it meet its end?
How does accomplishment come about?
Tell me, O supreme lord!”
16.­2

The Blessed One then said:

“Formations have ignorance for their cause.
Consciousness has formations for its cause.
Name and form have consciousness for their cause.
The six cognitive fields have name and form for their cause.
Contact has the six cognitive fields for its cause.
Sensation has contact for its cause.
Craving has sensation for its cause.
Grasping has craving for its cause.
Becoming has grasping for its cause.
Birth has becoming for its cause.
Old age, death, grief, lamentation, pain, despair, and turmoil have birth for their cause‍—in this way arises this whole great heap of suffering. [F.328.b]

17.
Chapter 17

Increasing the Semen

17.­1

Then the Blessed Lady said:

“Lord, this sexual union
Can increase and vitalize
The semen, menstrual blood, penis, vagina, and breasts,
Since it prevents the development of diseases.
17.­2
“As there are methods for bringing the woman’s mind to the state of enthrallment,
And also for treating barrenness,132
For arresting the semen, and causing the menstrual blood to flow‍—
Please explain these methods.”
17.­3

The Blessed One then said:

“Well done! Well done, O goddess,
That you have made this request to me!

18.
Chapter 18

Preventing Disease

18.­1

Then the lord said:

“One should blend the root of castor-oil plant with sour gruel, and rub it on the head. This will cure headache.

18.­2

“One should fill the ear with lukewarm urine of a goat, cow, or human, with added salt. This will cure ear diseases. Alternatively one should place a dried spider into sesame oil.146

18.­3

“One should make a pill from clearing nut, long pepper, emblic myrobalan, turmeric, and sweet flag, mixed with dew water. If one anoints the eyes with it, all eye diseases will be cured. Alternatively one should anoint them with honey and long pepper.


19.
Chapter 19

Retention of Semen and Similar Practices

19.­1

Then the lord said:

“One should make a pill from the root of white butterfly pea with semen, and make a tilak mark on a woman’s forehead. Then she will become enthralled.

19.­2

“One should smear one’s penis with tubeflower, sweet flag, and honey, and make love to a woman. One will enthrall her.

19.­3

“One should administer to a woman costus and the root of vernonia, together with betel. Similarly one can administer tubeflower, false black pepper, sweet flag, costus, and cobra’s saffron, together with betel. She will become enthralled.158


20.
Chapter 20

Mantras and Yantras

20.­1

Then the goddess requested the lord:

“I would like to learn about other things,
Which are equally interesting, O lord!
Namely about the proficiency in mantra and yantra,
Which have been described as being of many types.
20.­2
“Also everything about the practice of winds
And the signs of death.
Also about the nature of the body as an instrument‍—
Please do me this favor, right now!”
20.­3

The lord then said:

“Well done, O goddess, well done! It is good that
You have asked me about this.
Accordingly I will now deliver
A complete summary of the disciplines.

21.
Chapter 21

Magical Practices

21.­1

Then the lord said:

“One should perform all the following rituals with this mantra while visualizing Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa: ‘Oṁ, Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa, you who are a teacher of all magic! Teach all the magical methods to remove obstacles! Hūṁ phaṭ!’225

21.­2

“One should saturate a thickly woven cloth with the sap of cluster fig. Then one should blend sesame oil with oleogum resin, and throw it onto this cloth. One should make a wick from it. The lamp, with its glow, will burn steadily under water.226


22.
Chapter 22

Controlling Prāṇa

22.­1

The lord then said:

“Prāṇa is in the heart, apāna in the anus,
Samāna in the navel area,
Udāna in the area of the throat,
And vyāna in the entire body.
22.­2
“The most important among them is
The prāṇa, located in the heart.
Through the cycle of breathing in and out,
It sustains the life of all beings.
22.­3
“With the system of sixteen saṃkrānti,
Each breath is one daṇḍa in duration.
With the passing of the four maṇḍalas,
There are 21,600 breaths.
22.­4
“Breathing through the right nostril‍—
This is called the maṇḍala of fire.
Breathing through the left nostril‍—
This is called the maṇḍala of wind.

23.
Chapter 23

Signs of Death

23.­1

Then the lord said:

“If one feels a prickling sensation in one’s navel when pricking the soles of the feet, death will come within three days. If one feels a prickling sensation in one’s eyes when pricking the soles of the feet, it will come within three months. If one feels a prickling sensation in one’s nose when pricking the soles of one’s feet, it will come within three months.


24.
Chapter 24

Nature of the Body

24.­1

Then the lord said:

“After the mother and the father unite,
The moon has the nature of the five elements and
The sun has the nature of the five elements.
Through the meeting of these two,
24.­2
“A being is born again‍—
One of the nature of wisdom and means.
Bones and sinews will be formed from the moon;
And flesh, and other matter, from the sun.
24.­3
“It becomes a body, which is devoid of self,
And is produced by the beings’ karma.
By nature it is like a magical display,
Similar to a city of gandharvas.

25.
Chapter 25

Deity Practice

25.­1

Then the goddess said:

“I want to hear more
About the arising of the perfection of wisdom‌.
Please grant me this favor, my lord;
Speak briefly, without elaborating too much.”
25.­2

The lord then said:

“I will now teach
The arising of Perfection of Wisdom‌‍—
The goddess who sits in sattvaparyaṅka posture,
With the body of a sixteen-year-old.
25.­3
“She is blue, greatly exalted in merit,
Crowned with Akṣobhya.
In her raised right hand, she holds a red lotus;
In her left hand, which is in the playful attitude,

c.

Colophon

c.­1

Dharmas arise based on causes, and those causes and their cessation the Thus-Gone One has explained. This is the teaching of the Great Ascetic.265


ap.
Appendix

Sanskrit Text

Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇatantram
app.

Prologue to the Sanskrit Text

app.­1

Sigla:

Manuscripts

A – Ekallavīranāmacaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantram. Royal Asiatic Society, London. Ref.: Cowell 46/31.

B – Ekallavīranāmacaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantram. National Archives of Nepal, Kathmandu. Ref.: NGMPP 3/687, Reel no. A 994/4.

Gt – Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇatantram. University of Göttingen Library, Göttingen. Ref.: Bandurski Xc 14/43–45.

P – Padmāvatīnāmā Pañjikā by Mahāsukhavajra. National Archives of Nepal, Kathmandu. Ref.: NGMPP 3/502, Reel no. B 31/7.

Published Editions

G – George 1974

Po – Poussin 1897

T – Dpal gtum po khro bo chen po’i rgyud kyi rgyal po dpa’ bo gcig pa zhes bya ba. Toh 431, Degé Kangyur, vol 80 (rgyud ’bum, nga), folios 304b–343a.

app.­2

Critical apparatus:

[ ] – square brackets indicate text supplied by the editor.

conj. – conjectured

em. – emended

om. – omitted

†† – daggers indicate unsolved text.

· – “middle dot” indicates an absence of sandhi.


app.­3

The following is a half-critical, half-diplomatic edition. One of the sources used for the first eight chapters was the Sanskrit text included in George (1974), and for chapter 16, the Sanskrit text in Poussin (1897). Most of the readings adopted here that depart from these two editions have been reported, but on the whole, variant readings have been reported only selectively. The edition follows mainly Manuscript A, our most reliable source.

The abbreviation “Mss” can denote any combination of the above listed manuscripts. Unreported emendments include the standardization of Sanskrit sibilants or sandhi emendments. Sometimes the sandhi has not been applied, for example, in mantras where it would not be pronounced, or metri causa. Some of such instances have been marked with “ · ” (the “middle dot”). We apologize for any editorial errors and other shortcomings.

ap1.

Chapter A1

ap1.­1
oṁ namaś caṇḍamahāroṣaṇāya ||

evaṃ mayā śrutam ekasmin samaye bhagavān vajrasattvaḥ sarvatathāgatakāyavākcittahṛdayavajradhātvīśvarībhage vijahāra | anekaiś ca vajrayogiyoginīgaṇaiḥ | tadyathā | śvetācalena vajrayoginā | pītācalena ca vajrayoginā | raktācalena ca vajrayoginā | śyāmācalena ca vajrayoginā | mohavajryā ca vajrayoginyā | piśunavajryā ca vajrayoginyā | rāgavajryā ca vajrayoginyā | īrṣyāvajryā ca vajrayoginyā | evaṃpramukhair yogiyoginīkoṭiniyutaśatasahasraiḥ ||


ap1.­2
atha bhagavān vajrasattvaḥ kṛṣṇācala­samādhiṃ samāpadyedam udājahāra |
bhāvābhāvavinirmuktaś caturānandaikatatparaḥ |
niṣprapañcasvarūpo 'haṃ sarvasaṃkalpavarjitaḥ ||
ap1.­3
māṃ na jānanti ye mūḍhāḥ sarvapumvapuṣi sthitam |
teṣām ahaṃ hitārthāya pañcākāreṇa saṃsthitaḥ ||
ap1.­4
atha bhagavatī vajradhātvīśvarī dveṣavajrīsamādhiṃ samāpadyedam udājahāra |
śūnyatākaruṇābhinnā divyakāmasukhasthitā |
sarvakalpavihīnāhaṃ niṣprapañcā nirākulā ||
ap1.­5
māṃ na jānanti yā nāryaḥ sarvastrīdehasaṃsthitām |
tāsām ahaṃ hitārthāya pañcākāreṇa saṃsthitā ||
ap1.­6
atha bhagavān kṛṣṇācalo gāḍhena bhagavatīṃ dveṣavajrīñ cumbayitvā samālingya cāmantrayate sma |
devi devi mahāramyaṃ rahasyaṃ cātidurlabham |
sārāt sārataraṃ śreṣṭhaṃ sarvabuddhaiḥ subhāṣitam ||
ap1.­7
śṛṇu vakṣye mahātantraṃ tantrarājeśvaraṃ param |
nāmnā caikalavīraṃ tu sattvānām āśusiddhaye ||
ap1.­8
aprakāśyam idaṃ tantram adṛṣṭamaṇḍalasya hi |
nānyamaṇḍalapraviṣṭasya tantrarājaṃ tu darśayet ||
ap1.­9
maṇḍale caṇḍaroṣasya praviṣṭo yaḥ samāhitaḥ |
śraddhāyatnaparaś caṇḍe tasya tantraṃ tu deśayet ||
ap1.­10
gurau bhaktaḥ kṛpāluś ca mantrayānaparāyanaḥ |
bhaktaś caṇḍeśvare nityaṃ tasya tantraṃ pradarśayet ||
ap1.­11
evaṃ buddhvā tu yaḥ kaścid yogī lobhaviḍambitaḥ |
caṇḍasya maṇḍalādṛṣṭe deśayet tantram uttamam ||
ap1.­12
sa mahāvyādhibhir grasto viṣṭhāmūtramalīkṛtaḥ |
ṣaṇmāsābhyantare tasya mṛtyuduḥkhaṃ bhaviṣyati ||
ap1.­13
yamadūtais tato grastaḥ kālapāśavaśīkṛtaḥ |
narakaṃ nīyate pāpī yadi buddhair api rakṣitaḥ ||
ap1.­14
yadi karmakṣayād duḥkhaṃ bhuktvā ca lakṣavatsaraṃ |
mānuṣyaṃ prāpyate janma tatra vajreṇa bhidyate ||
ap1.­15
tasmāc ca maṇḍalaṃ cāru vartayen mantravidvratī |
praveśya tatra vai śiṣyān pūrvam eva parīkṣitān ||
ap1.­16
tato hi deśayet tantraṃ triṣu lokeṣu durlabham |
aśrutaṃ deśayet yo 'pi so 'pi gacchaty adhogatim ||
ap1.­17
mukhapāko bhavet tasya yadi buddhasamo 'pi hi |
śraddhāhīno 'thavā śiṣyaḥ śṛṇute jijñāsanāya ca ||
ap1.­18
bhidyate mūrdhni vajreṇa vṛṣṭikāle na saṃśayaḥ |
tathyam etan mayā devi bhāṣitaṃ ca varānane ||
ap1.­19
tantre caikalavīre 'smin sugupte caṇḍaroṣaṇe ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre tantrāvatāraṇapaṭalaḥ prathamaḥ ||
ap2.

Chapter A2

ap2.­1
atha bhagavatī dveṣavajrī bhagavantaṃ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇaṃ gāḍham āliṅgyāha |
maṇḍalasya kiyan mānaṃ vartanīyañ ca kena hi |
likhitavyañ ca tathā tatra madhye kiṃ brūhi me prabho ||
ap2.­2
atha bhagavān āha |
maṇḍalasya bhaven mānaṃ caikahastaṃ dvihastakam |
trihastaṃ vā catuḥpañca pañcamānaṃ na cādhikam ||
ap2.­3
yasya tasyaiva cūrṇena nānāvarṇakṛtena ca |
caturaśrañ caturdvāraṃ catustoraṇābhūṣitam ||
ap2.­4
bhāgena cāṣṭamenaiva dvāraṃ tasya prakalpayet |
dvāramānena niryūhaṃ tadardhena kapolakam ||
ap2.­5
pakṣaṃ cāpi tathā vedīhārārdhahārapaṭṭikām |
mūlasūtrabahis tasyās tu266 ardhenaiva rajobhuvam ||
ap2.­6
vajrāvalīṃ tu tenaiva aṣṭastambhāṃś ca kalpayet |
dvārāt triguṇitaṃ kuryāt dvāratoraṇam uttamam ||
ap2.­7
viśvavajram adho likhyaṃ vajraprākāraveṣṭitam |
kalpavṛkṣādibhir yuktaṃ caṇḍaroṣaṇamaṇḍalam ||
ap2.­8
puṭam ekaṃ ca kartavyaṃ cakravat parimaṇḍalam |
tasya pūrvādike viśvapadmaṃ aṣṭau samālikhet ||
ap2.­9
navamaṃ madhyame tasya madhye khaḍgaṃ sunīlakam |
vajreṇāṅkitaṃ taṃ ca vajrakarttikapālayutam ||
ap2.­10
pūrve cakrāṅkitaṃ khaḍgaṃ śvetavarṇaṃ samālikhet |
dakṣiṇe pītavarṇaṃ tu yutaṃ ratnena saṃlikhet ||
ap2.­11
paścime raktavarṇaṃ tu raktapadmena cihnitam |
uttare khaḍgamātraṃ tu śyāmavarṇaṃ samālikhet ||
ap2.­12
cakreṇa cihnitaṃ karttiṃ agnikoṇe sitāṃ likhet |
nairṛte pītavarṇāṃ tu likhed ratnasucihnitam ||
ap2.­13
vāyavye ca tathā raktāṃ raktapadmasucihnitām |
aiśāne śyāmavarṇāṃ tu nīlotpalasamanvitām ||
ap2.­14
candrasūryoparisthaṃ tu sarvacihnaṃ prakalpayet |
rajomaṇḍalam idaṃ proktaṃ mayā lokārthasādhane ||
ap2.­15
athavā maṇḍalaṃ kuryāt paṭarūpeṇa sulikhitam |
pūrvavat maṇḍalaṃ likhyaṃ madhye kṛṣṇācalaṃ likhet ||
ap2.­16
sampuṭaṃ dveṣavajryā vai pūrve śvetācalaṃ likhet |
tathā pītācalaṃ savye pṛṣṭhe raktācalaṃ likhet ||
ap2.­17
likhed uttare śyāmācalaṃ vahnau mohavajrīṃ |
śvetāṃ nairṛte pītāṃ piśunavajrīṃ samālikhet ||
ap2.­18
vāyavye lohitāṃ devīṃ rāgavajrīṃ samālikhet |
aiśāne īrṣyāvajrīṃ śyāmāṃ likhed vai paṭamaṇḍalam ||
ap2.­19
atha maṇḍalādhiṣṭhānamantraṃ bhavati |
oṁ śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇa sarvaparivārasahita āgaccha āgaccha jaḥ hūṁ vaṁ hoḥ atra maṇḍale adhiṣṭhānaṃ kuru hūṁ phaṭ svāhā ||
anenākṛṣya praveśya baddhvā vaśīkṛtya pūjayet ||
ap2.­20
atha pūjāmantraṃ bhavati |
oṁ kṛṣṇācala puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ |
oṁ śvetācala puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ |
oṁ pītācala puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ |
oṁ raktācala puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ |
oṁ śyāmācala puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ ||
ap2.­21
oṁ dveṣavajri puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ |
oṁ mohavajri puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ |
oṁ piśunavajri puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ |
oṁ rāgavajri puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ |
oṁ īrṣyāvajri puṣpaṃ pratīccha hūṁ phaṭ ||
ap2.­22
puṣpaṃ dīpaṃ tathā dhūpaṃ gandhaṃ naivedyam eva ca |
pūjāṃ pañcopahāreṇa kuryād vai maṇḍalasya hi ||
ap2.­23
yadā śvetācalo madhye mohavajryā samanvitaḥ |
tasyaiva maṇḍalaṃ jñeyam evaṃ pītācalādike ||
ap2.­24
pañcayogiprabhedena pañcamaṇḍalakalpanam |
kuryād ekāgracittena pūrvasevākṛtaśramaḥ ||
ap2.­25
maṇḍalaṃ pariveṣṭyaiva yoginīṃ yogisampuṭām |
bhojayen madyamāṃsaiś ca vandayec ca muhur muhuḥ ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre maṇḍalapaṭalo dvitīyaḥ ||
ap3.

Chapter A3

ap3.­1
atha bhagavaty āha |
kathaṃ śiṣyo bhavet bhavyo yojitavyo 'tra tantrake |
nirviśaṅkaś ca kartavyaḥ kathaya tvaṃ mahāprabho ||
ap3.­2
atha bhagavān āha |
ādau triśaraṇaṃ dadyāt pañcaśikṣāś ca poṣadham |
tataḥ pañcābhiṣekaṃ tu guhyaṃ prajñāṃ ca śeṣataḥ ||
ap3.­3
tato bhavyo bhavec chiṣyas tantraṃ tasyaiva deśayet |
dūrato varjayed anyam anyathā rauravaṃ vrajet ||
ap3.­4
tatreyaṃ triśaraṇagāthā |
buddhaṃ gacchāmi śaraṇaṃ yāvad ābodhimaṇḍataḥ |
dharmaṃ gacchāmi śaraṇaṃ saṅghaṃ cāvetyaśraddhayā ||
ap3.­5
tatreyaṃ pañcaśikṣāgāthā |
māraṇaṃ caurikāṃ cāpi parapatnīṃ mṛṣāvacaḥ |
tyajāmi sarpavat sarvaṃ pañcamaṃ madyaṃ eva ca ||
ap3.­6
tatreyaṃ poṣadhagāthā |
na sattvaṃ ghātayiṣyāmi na hariṣye parasvakaṃ |
brahmacaryaṃ cariṣyāmi varjayiṣye mṛṣāvacaḥ ||
ap3.­7
pramadāyātanaṃ madyaṃ na pāsyāmi kadācana |
nṛtyagītavibhūṣāñ ca varjayiṣyāmi sotsavām ||
ap3.­8
uccaiḥśayyāṃ mahāśayyāṃ vikāle 'pi ca bhojanam |
evaṃ poṣadham aṣṭāṅgam arhatām anuśikṣayā ||
ap3.­9
viśuddhaṃ dhārayiṣyāmi yathā buddhena deśitaṃ |
tena jitvā śaṭhamāraṃ prāpya buddhatvam uttamam ||
ap3.­10
bhaveyaṃ bhavakhinnānāṃ śaraṇaṃ sarvadehinām |
saṃsarāmi bhave yāvat tāvat sugatajaḥ pumān ||
ap3.­11
bhaveyaṃ sādhusaṃsargī dhīmān lokahite rataḥ ||
ap3.­12
tatrāyam udakābhiṣekaḥ |

śiṣyaṃ śuddhaṃ sphaṭikasaṃkāśaṃ nirmalaṃ dhyātvā vijayakalaśād udakam ākṛṣya sahakārapallavena oṁ āḥ sarvatathāgatābhiṣekasamayaśriye hūṁ ity anenābhiṣiñcet ||


ap3.­13
tatrāyaṃ makuṭābhiṣekaḥ |

vastrādighaṭitaṃ makuṭaṃ sarvaratnam ivākalayya śiṣyaṃ cakravartinam iva dhyātvā tacchirasi makuṭaṃ dattvā pūrvavad abhiṣiñcayet | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa āviśa āviśa asya hṛdaye hūṁ phaṭ ||


ap3.­14
tatrāyaṃ khaḍgābhiṣekaḥ |

lohādimayaṃ khaḍgaṃ tasya dakṣiṇahaste dattvā pūrvavad abhiṣiñcayet | oṁ hana hana māraya māraya sarvaśatrūñ jñānakhaḍga hūṁ phaṭ ||


ap3.­15
tatrāyaṃ pāśābhiṣekaḥ |

tāmrādimayaṃ pāśam tasya tarjanīyute vāmahaste dattvā pūrvavad abhiṣiñcet | oṁ gṛhṇa gṛhṇa kaṭṭa kaṭṭa sarvaduṣṭān pāśena bandha bandha mahāsatya te dharma te svāhā ||


ap3.­16
tatrāyaṃ nāmābhiṣekaḥ |

śiṣyaṃ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇamudrayopaveśya tadākāreṇa ca tam ālambya | oṁ he śrībhagavan kṛṣṇācala siddhas tvaṃ hūṁ phaṭ | tataḥ pūrvavad abhiṣiñcet | evaṃ sādhakasya kṛṣṇādivarṅabhedena pañcācalanāmnābhiṣeko deyaḥ | iti pañcābhiṣekaḥ ||


ap3.­17

strīṇāṃ tu makuṭābhiṣekaṃ tyaktvā sindūrābhiṣekaṃ dadyāt | paṭu267 mahādevīrūpāṃ śiṣyām ālambya | oṁ bhagavati āviśa āviśa asyā hṛdaye hūṁ phaṭ | lauhādikarttikān tasyā dakṣiṇahaste dadyāt | oṁ karttike sarvamārāṇāṃ māṃsaṃ kartaya kartaya hūṁ phaṭ | vāmahaste nṛkapālaṃ dārvādikṛtaṃ dadyāt || oṁ kapāla sarvaśatrūṇāṃ raktaṃ dhāraya dhāraya hūṁ phaṭ | tato bhagavatīmudrayopaveśya tadākāreṇa cālambya | oṁ he śrīdveṣavajri siddhā tvaṃ hūṁ phaṭ | evaṃ striyaḥ kṛṣṇādivarṇabhedena pañcayoginīnāṃ nāmnābhiṣiñcet | āsāṃ tu prajñābhiṣekasthāne upāyābhiṣeko deya iti ||


ap3.­18
atha guhyābhiṣeko bhavati |
śiṣyo guruṃ vastrādibhiḥ sampūjya tasmai svamanovāñchitāṃ rūpayauvanamaṇḍitāṃ niryātayet |
iyaṃ niryātitā tubhyaṃ sarvakāmasukhapradā |
mayā kāmasukhārthaṃ te gṛhṇa nātha kṛpaṃ kuru ||
ap3.­19

tato guruṃ namaskṛtya śiṣyo bahir nirgacchet | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ iti mantraṃ japan tiṣṭhet | guruḥ punar madyamāṃsādibhir ātmānaṃ pūjayitvā, prajñāṃ ca saṃtarpya, sampuṭībhūya, tadudbhūtaṃ śukraśoṇitaṃ parṇapuṭādāv avasthāpya, śiṣyam āhūya, tasya jihvāyām anāmikāṅguṣṭhābhyāṃ dravyaṃ gṛhītvā, hūṁ phaṭ kāraṃ likhet | tato 'ho sukham iti pāṭhayec ca | tata evaṃ vadet | adyāhaṃ tena buddhajñānam utpādayāmi yenātītānāgatā pratyutpannā buddhā bhagavanto 'pratiṣṭhitanirvāṇaṃ prāptāḥ | kiṃ tu na tvayedam adṛṣṭamaṇḍalapurato vaktavyam | atha vadasi tadā ||


ap3.­20
tasya śiṣyasya hṛdaye khaḍgaṃ arpayitvedaṃ paṭhet |
atitīkṣṇo hy ayaṃ khaḍgaś caṇḍaroṣakare sthitaḥ |
bhedayet samayaṃ yas tu tasya chedanatatparaḥ ||
ap3.­21
janmakoṭisahasreṣu khaḍgavyagrakarā narāḥ |
sarvāṅgacchedakā bhonti śiraśchedaikatatparāḥ ||
ap3.­22
bhaviṣyati tavāpy evaṃ samayaṃ yadi bhetsyasi |
tataḥ śiṣyeṇa vaktavyam evam astu iti ||

ap3.­23

tato 'ndhapaṭṭaṃ bandhayitvā maṇḍale puṣpaṃ pātayet | tato 'ndhapaṭṭaṃ muktvā maṇḍalaṃ pradarśayet | yasya yac cihnaṃ tad bodhayet | tatas tām eva prajñāṃ śiṣyasya samarpayet ||


ap3.­24
iyaṃ te dhāraṇī ramyā sevyā buddhaiḥ prakāśitā |
atikrāmati yo mūḍhaḥ siddhis tasya na cottamā ||
ap3.­25

tato guruḥ karṇe kathayet caturānandavibhāgam | tato bahir nirgacched guruḥ | prajñā tu nagnībhūyotkuṭakena guhyaṃ tarjanyā darśayati ||


ap3.­26
kiṃ tvaṃ utsahase vatsa madīyāśucibhakṣaṇam |
viṇmūtraṃ caiva raktaṃ ca bhagasyāntaḥ pracūṣaṇam ||
ap3.­27
sādhakena vaktavyam |
kiṃ cāhaṃ notsahe mātas tvadīyāśucibhakṣaṇam |
kāryā bhaktir mayā strīṇāṃ yāvad ābodhimaṇḍataḥ ||
ap3.­28
sā cāha |
aho madīyaṃ yaṃ padmaṃ sarvasukhasamanvitam |
sevayed yo vidhānena tasyāhaṃ siddhidāyinī ||
ap3.­29
kuru padme yathākāryam dhairyaṃ dhairyaprayogataḥ |
svayaṃ caṇḍamahāroṣaḥ sthito hy atra mahāsukham ||
ap3.­30

tataḥ sādhaka ātmānaṃ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇākāreṇa dhyātvā prajñāṃ ca dveṣavajrīrūpeṇa sampuṭaṃ kṛtvā caturānandān lakṣayet | tato niṣpanne guruṃ pramukhaṃ kṛtvā madyamāṃsādibhir gaṇacakraṃ268 kuryāt | iti prajñābhiṣekaḥ ||

ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre 'bhiṣekapaṭalas tṛtīyaḥ ||
ap4.

Chapter A4

ap4.­1
atha bhagavaty āha |
bhāvitavyaṃ kathaṃ caṇḍaroṣaṇabhāvakena hi |
japtavyaṃ kīdṛśaṃ mantraṃ vada tvaṃ parameśvara ||
ap4.­2
atha bhagavān āha |
mano 'nukūlake deśe sarvopadravavarjite |
āsanaṃ kalpayet tatra yathālabdhaṃ samāhitaḥ ||
ap4.­3
prathamaṃ bhāvayen maitrīṃ dvitīye karuṇāṃ vibhāvayet |
tṛtīye bhāvayen muditām upekṣāṃ sarvaśeṣataḥ ||
ap4.­4
tato hṛdi bhāvayed bījaṃ padmacandraraviṣṭhitam |
raśmibhiḥ purato dhyāyān niṣpannaṃ caṇḍaroṣaṇam ||
ap4.­5
pūjayen manasā taṃ ca puṣpadhūpādibhir budhaḥ |
tadagre deśayet pāpaṃ sarvapuṇyaṃ pramodayet ||
ap4.­6
triśaraṇaṃ gamanaṃ kuryād yācanādhyeṣaṇām api |
ātmānaṃ ca tato dattvā puṇyaṃ ca pariṇāmayet ||
ap4.­7
praṇidhānaṃ tataḥ kṛtvā bodhau cittaṃ tu nāmayet |
namaskāraṃ tataḥ kuryāt raśmibhiḥ saṃharet punaḥ ||
ap4.­8
paṭhitvā mantram etad dhi śūnyatādhyānam ācaret ||
ap4.­9
oṁ śūnyatājñānavajrasvabhāvātmako 'ham ||
cintayed raśmibhir dagdhaṃ sa hūṁkāraṃ prayatnataḥ |
karpūradāhavad dhyātvā raśmiṃ cāpi na kalpayet ||
ap4.­10
sarvam ākāśasaṃkāśaṃ kṣaṇamātraṃ vibhāvya ca |
śuddhasphaṭikavat svaccham ātmadehaṃ vibhāvayet ||
ap4.­11
agrato bhāvayet paścāt yaṁ raṁ vaṁ laṁ catuṣṭayam |
niṣpannaṃ bhāvayet tena vātavahnijalorvikām ||
ap4.­12
bhruṁkāraṃ ca tato dhyātvā kūṭāgāraṃ prakalpayet |
caturasraṃ caturdvāraṃ aṣṭastambhopaśobhitam ||
ap4.­13
dhyāyet tanmadhyake padmaṃ viśvaṃ aṣṭadalānvitam |
paṁkārabījasambhūtaṃ tatra aṁkārajaṃ vidhum ||
ap4.­14
raviṃ raṁkārajātaṃ ca tadūrdhvaṃ hūṁkṛtiṃ punaḥ |
tajjam akṣobhyakaṃ dhyāyān269 māmakyā saha sampuṭam ||
ap4.­15
saṃkramet tatra yogīndras tasya mūrdhabilena ca |
tārāsaṃkrāntiyogena māmakībhagacetasā ||
ap4.­16
tataḥ śukrarasībhūtaḥ patet tasyā bhagodare |
niṣpannaṃ caṇḍarūpaṃ tu niḥsarec ca bhagāt tataḥ ||
ap4.­17
hanyāt khaḍgena cākṣobhyaṃ pitaraṃ paścāt prabhakṣayet |
māmakyāpi tatas taṃ ca bhakṣitaṃ vai prakalpayet ||
ap4.­18
tato hi māmakīṃ gṛhya mātaraṃ samprakāmayet |
tayācāliṅgitaṃ dhyāyed dveṣavajrīsvarūpataḥ ||
ap4.­19
khaḍgograkaraṃ savye vāme pāśasamanvitam |
tarjanyā tarjayantaṃ ca daṃṣṭroṣṭhaṃ tu nipīditam ||
ap4.­20
samprahārapadaṃ savye caturmāravimardanaṃ |
vāme bhūmiṣṭhajānuṃ ca kekarākṣaṃ bhayānakam ||
ap4.­21
vasudhāṃ tarjayantaṃ ca vāmajānvagrataḥ sthitam |
akṣobhyakṛtamaulaṃ tu nīlaṃ ratnakirīṭinaṃ ||
ap4.­22
pañcacīraṃ kumāraṃ ca sarvālaṅkārabhūṣitam |
dvirāṣṭavarṣākāraṃ ca raktacakṣurdvayaṃ vibhum ||
ap4.­23
bhāvayet sthiracittena siddho 'haṃ caṇḍaroṣaṇaḥ |
tato manthānayogena pūrve śvetācalaṃ sṛjet ||
ap4.­24
mohavajrīṃ sṛjed agnau śaratpuṇḍra270 samaprabhām |
pītācalaṃ sṛjet savye piśunavajrīṃ ca nairṛte ||
ap4.­25
raktācalaṃ sṛjet pṛṣṭhe raktāṃ ca rāgavajrikām |
vāyavye cottare śyāmācalaṃ śyāmāṃ īśānake ||
ap4.­26
īrṣyāvajrīṃ sṛjet paścāt sa prajñodgatim āvahet |
codayanti tato devyaḥ svakaṇṭhoditagītibhiḥ ||
ap4.­27
pahu maitī tu vivarjia hohi mā śunnasahāva |
tojju viyoe phiṭumi sarve sarve hi tāva ca ||
ap4.­28
mohavajryāḥ |
mā karuṇācia iṭṭahi pahu mā hohi tu śunna |
mā mojju deha sudukkhia hoi hai jīva vihuna ||
ap4.­29
piśunavajryāḥ |
kī santu harisa vihohia śunnahi karasi paveśa |
tojju nimantaṇa karia manua cchai lohāśeṣa ||
ap4.­30
rāgavajryāḥ |
yovanavuṇttim upekhia niṣphala śunnae ditti |
śunnasahāva vigoia karahi tu mea sama ghiṭṭi ||
ap4.­31
īrṣyāvajryāḥ |
svapneneva271 idaṃ śrutvā dravāj jhaṭiti utthitaḥ |
pūrvakenaiva rūpeṇa dhyāyāt taṃ sampuṭātmakam ||
ap4.­32
tataḥ śvetācalaṃ hatvā mohavajrīṃ prakāmayet |
rūpaṃ śvetācalaṃ kṛtvā punaḥ pītācalaṃ haret ||
ap4.­33
kāmayet piśunavajrīṃ tu kṛtvā pītācalatmakam272 |
hatvā raktācalaṃ tadvat kāmayed rāgavajrikām ||
ap4.­34
kṛtvā raktācalātmakaṃ hanyāc chyāmācalaṃ punaḥ |
īrṣyāvajrīṃ tataḥ kāmya kṛtvā śyāmācalātmakam ||
ap4.­35
anurāgya caturdevīṃ saṃharet sarvamaṇḍalam |
sampuṭaṃ caikam ātmānaṃ bhāvayen nirbharaṃ yatī ||
ap4.­36
ahaṃkāraṃ tataḥ kuryāt siddho 'haṃ naiva saṃśayaḥ |
kṛṣṇavarṇo hi yo yogī sa kṛṣṇācalabhāvakaḥ ||
ap4.­37
śvetagauro hi yo yogī sa śvetācalabhāvakaḥ |
pītavarṇo hi yo yogī sa pītācalabhāvakaḥ ||
ap4.­38
raktagauro hi yo yogī sa raktācalabhāvakaḥ |
śyāmavarṇo hi yo yogī sa śyāmācalabhāvakaḥ ||
ap4.­39
kṛṣṇavarṇā tu yā nārī dveṣavajrīṃ vibhāvayet |
śvetagaurā tu yā nārī mohavajrīṃ vibhāvayet ||
ap4.­40
pītavarṇā tu yā nārī piśunavajrīṃ vibhāvayet |
raktagaurā tu yā nārī rāgavajrīṃ vibhāvayet ||
ap4.­41
śyāmavarṇā tu yā nārī īrṣyāvajrīṃ vibhāvayet |
vajrayogī naraḥ sarvo nārī tu vajrayoginī ||
ap4.­42
kṛṣṇādivarṇabhedena sarvam etat prakalpayet |
athavā karmabhedena pañcabhedaprakalpanam ||
ap4.­43
kṛṣṇo hi māraṇe dveṣe śvetaḥ śāntau matāv api |
pītaḥ stambhane puṣṭau vaśyākṛṣṭe tu lohitaḥ ||
ap4.­44
śyāma uccāṭane khyāto yad vā jātiprabhedataḥ |
kṛṣṇo ḍombaḥ śito vipraḥ pītaś cāṇḍālako mataḥ ||
ap4.­45
raktas tu naṭakaḥ śyāmaḥ smṛto rajaka ity api |
kṛṣṇakanyāṃ viśālākṣīṃ kāmayet kṛṣṇabhāvakaḥ ||
ap4.­46
śitakanyāṃ śitātmā tu pītakanyāṃ supītakaḥ |
rakto hi raktakanyāṃ tu śyāmakanyāṃ tu śyāmakaḥ ||
ap4.­47
yāṃ tām athavā gṛhya yattadā bhāvanāparaḥ |
kāmayet sthiracittena yathā ko 'pi na budhyate ||
ap4.­48
etāḥ susiddhidāḥ kanyāḥ pakṣamātraprayogataḥ |
āsāṃ śukraṃ bhaved vajraṃ jihvayā sarvam ālikhet ||
ap4.­49
yāvadicchaṃ pibet mūtraṃ tāsām arpya bhage mukham |
gudapadme cārpya vai viṣṭhāṃ yāvadicchaṃ prabhakṣayet ||
ap4.­50
na kartavyā ghṛṇālpāpi siddhibhraṃśo 'nyathā bhavet |
nijāhāram idaṃ śreṣṭhaṃ sarvabuddhaiḥ prabhakṣitam ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre devatāpaṭalaś caturthaḥ ||
ap5.

Chapter A5

ap5.­1

athātaḥ sampravakṣyāmi sarvamantrasamuccayam | atha bhagavān sarvamāraparājayaṃ nāma samādhiṃ samāpadyedaṃ mantrasamuccayam āha |

oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | mūlamantraḥ ||
oṁ acala hūṁ phaṭ | dvitīyamūlamantraḥ ||
oṁ hūṁ phaṭ | tṛtīyamūlamantraḥ ||
hūṁ | hṛdayamantraḥ ||
āṁ | hṛdayamantro dvitīyaḥ ||
haṁ | tṛtīyahṛdayamantraḥ ||
ap5.­2

oṁ hrāṁ hrīṁ hrauṁ caṇḍarūpe caṭa caṭa pracaṭa pracaṭa kaṭṭa kaṭṭa prasphura prasphura prasphāraya prasphāraya hana hana grasa grasa bandha bandha jambhaya jambhaya stambhaya stambhaya mohaya mohaya sarvaśatrūṇāṃ mukhabandhanaṃ kuru kuru sarvaḍākinīnāṃ graha­bhūta­piśāca­vyādhi­yakṣānāṃ trāsaya trāsaya mara mara māraya māraya rurucaṇḍaruk rakṣa rakṣa devadattaṃ caṇḍamahāsenaḥ sarvam ājñāpayati | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | mālāmantraḥ ||

ap5.­3

namaḥ sarvāśāparipūrakebhyaḥ sarva­tathāgatebhyaḥ | sarva­thācalakānanā naṭṭa naṭṭa moṭṭa moṭṭa saṭṭa saṭṭa tuṭṭa tuṭṭa tiṣṭha tiṣṭha āviśa āviśa āḥ mahāmatta­bālaka dhūṇa dhūṇa tiṇa tiṇa khāda khāda vighnān māraya māraya duṣṭān bhakṣa bhakṣa devadattaṃ273 kuru kuru kiri kiri mahāviṣa274 vajra phaṭ hūṁ hūṁ hūṁ | trivalita275 raṅgāgartaka276 hūṁ hūṁ hūṁ | acala ceṭa phaṭ sphāṭaya sphāṭaya hūṁ hūṁ asamantika277 trāṭ mahābala sāṭaya278 samānaya279 trāṁ māṁ hāṁ śuddhyantu lokāḥ | tuṣyatu vajrī | namo 'stv apratihatabalebhyaḥ | jvālaya trāṭ asaha namaḥ svāhā | dvitīyamālāmantraḥ ||

ap5.­4

namaḥ sarvāśāparipūrakebhyaḥ sarvatathāgatebhyaḥ sarvathā trāṭ amogha­caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa sphāṭaya280 sphāṭaya hūṁ bhramaya bhramaya hūṁ trāṭ hāṁ māṁ | tṛtīyo mālāmantraḥ ||

iti pañcācalānāṃ sāmānyamantrāḥ ||
ap5.­5
viśeṣamantrās tu |
oṁ kṛṣṇācala hūṁ phaṭ ||
oṁ śvetācala hūṁ phaṭ ||
oṁ pītācala hūṁ phaṭ ||
oṁ raktācala hūṁ phaṭ ||
oṁ śyāmācala hūṁ phaṭ ||
ap5.­6
devīnāṃ tu sāmānyamantrāḥ |
oṁ vajrayogini hūṁ phaṭ | mūlamantraḥ ||
oṁ prajñāpāramite hūṁ phaṭ | dvitīyamūlamantraḥ ||
oṁ vauheri hūṁ phaṭ | tṛtīyamūlamantraḥ ||
oṁ picu picu prajñāvardhani jvala jvala medhāvardhani dhiri dhiri buddhivardhani svāhā | mālāmantraḥ ||
ap5.­7
viśeṣamantrās tu |
oṁ dveṣavajri hūṁ phaṭ ||
oṁ mohavajri hūṁ phaṭ ||
oṁ piśunavajri hūṁ phaṭ ||
oṁ rāgavajri hūṁ phaṭ ||
oṁ īrṣyāvajri hūṁ phaṭ ||
ap5.­8
balimantraḥ sāmānyo 'yam |

oṁ namo bhagavate śrīcaṇḍamahā­roṣaṇāya devāsura­mānuṣyatrāsanāya samastamāra­balavināśanāya ratna­makuṭa­kṛtaśirase imaṃ baliṃ gṛhṇa gṛhṇa mama sarvavighnān hana hana caturmārān nivāraya nivāraya trāsa trāsa bhrāma bhrāma chinda chinda bhinda bhinda nāśa nāśa tāpa tāpa śoṣa śoṣa cheda cheda bheda bheda duṣṭasattvān mama viruddha­cittakān bhasmīkuru bhasmīkuru phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||

ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇa­tantre mantrapaṭalaḥ pañcamaḥ ||
ap6.

Chapter A6

ap6.­1

atha bhagavatī prajñāpāramitā bhagavantaṃ gāḍham āliṅgya padmena vajragharṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā prāha |

niṣpannakramayogena bhāvanā kīdṛśī bhavet |
yoginīnāṃ hitārthāya pṛcchitaṃ saphalīkuru ||
ap6.­2
atha bhagavān āha |
niṣpannakramayogastho yogī yogaikatatparaḥ |
bhāvayed ekacittena mama rūpam aharniśam ||
ap6.­3
kalpayet svastriyam tāvat tava rūpeṇa nirbharam281 |
gāḍhenaivātiyogena yathaiva sphuṭatāṃ vrajet ||
ap6.­4
mātaraṃ duhitaraṃ cāpi bhaginīṃ bhāgineyikām |
anyāṃ ca jñātinīṃ sarvāṃ ḍombinīṃ brāhmanīṃ tathā ||
ap6.­5
caṇḍālīṃ naṭakīṃ caiva rajakīṃ rūpajīvikāṃ |
vratinīṃ yoginīṃ caiva tathā kāpālinīṃ punaḥ ||
ap6.­6
anyāṃ vā282 yathāprāptāṃ strīrūpeṇa susaṃsthitāṃ |
sevayet suvidhānena yathā bhedo na jāyate ||
ap6.­7
bhede tu kupitaś caṇḍaroṣaṇo hanti sādhakaṃ |
avīcau pātayet taṃ ca khaḍgapāśena bhīṣayan283 ||
ap6.­8
neha loke bhavet siddhiḥ paraloke tathaiva ca |
tasmāc ca guptam atyantaṃ kartavyaṃ nāpi284 gocaram ||
ap6.­9
ḍākinīmantravad gopyaṃ caṇḍaroṣaṇasādhanaṃ |
atyantakāminām285 arthe mayā buddhena bhāṣitam ||
ap6.­10
mano 'nukulake deśe sarvopadravavarjite |
pracchanne tāṃ samādāya svacetoramyakāminīm ||
ap6.­11
buddho 'haṃ cācalaḥ siddhaḥ prajñāpāramitā priyā |
bhāvayet svasvarūpeṇa gāḍhena cetasā sudhiḥ ||
ap6.­12
nirjanaṃ cāśramaṃ kṛtvā yathālabdhānnavastukaḥ |
bhāvayen nirbharaṃ dvābhyāṃ anyonyadvandvayogataḥ ||
ap6.­13
striyaṃ pratyakṣataḥ kṛtvā saṃmukhīṃ286 copaveśya hi |
dvābhyām anyonyarāgeṇa gāḍham anyonyam īkṣayet287 ||
ap6.­14
tato dṛṣṭisukhaṃ dhyāyaṃs tiṣṭhed ekāgramānasaḥ |
tayā tatraiva vaktavyaṃ sukhottejaḥkaraṃ vacaḥ ||
ap6.­15
tvaṃ me putro 'si bhartāsi tvaṃ me bhrātā pitā mataḥ |
tavāhaṃ jananī bhāryā bhaginī bhāgineyikā ||
ap6.­16
saptabhiḥ puruṣair dāsas tvaṃ me kheṭāsa288 ceṭakaḥ |
tvaṃ me kapardakakrītas tavāhaṃ svāminī matā ||
ap6.­17
patec caraṇayos tasyā nirbharaṃ samputāñjaliḥ |
vadet tatredṛśaṃ vākyaṃ sukhottejaḥkaraṃ param ||
ap6.­18
tvaṃ me mātā pitur bhāryā tvaṃ me ca bhāgineyikā |
bhaginīputrabhāryā ca tvaṃ svasā tvaṃ ca māmikā ||
ap6.­19
tavāhaṃ sarvathā dāsas tīkṣṇabhaktiparāyaṇaḥ |
paśya māṃ kṛpayā mātaḥ snehadṛṣṭinirīkṣaṇaiḥ ||
ap6.­20
tataḥ sā puruṣaṃ śliṣṭvā cumbayitvā muhur muhuḥ |
dadāti tryakṣaraṃ maste vaktre vaktrarasaṃ madhu ||
ap6.­21
padmaṃ coṣāpayet tasya darśayen netravibhramaṃ |
vaktre ca carcitaṃ dattvā kucena pīḍayet hṛdam ||
ap6.­22
saṃmukhaṃ tanmukhaṃ dṛṣṭvā nakhaṃ dattvocitālaye289 |
vadet tasyedṛśaṃ vākyaṃ bhakṣa vairocanaṃ mama ||
ap6.­23
pibākṣobhyajalaṃ putra sapitrā dāsako bhava |
tava gosvāminī cāhaṃ mātā rājakūlīty api ||
ap6.­24
madīyaṃ caraṇaṃ gaccha śaraṇaṃ vatsa nirantaram |
mayā saṃvardhito yasmāt tvam ānarghyam290 upāgataḥ291 ||
ap6.­25
kṛtajño bhava bho vatsa dehi me vajrajaṃ sukham |
tridalaṃ paṅkajaṃ paśya madhye kiñjalkabhūṣitam ||
ap6.­26
aho sukhāvatīkṣetraṃ raktabuddhopaśobhitaṃ |
rāgiṇāṃ sukhadaṃ śāntaṃ sarvakalpavivarjitam ||
ap6.­27
mām uttānena sampātya292 rāgavihvalamānasām |
skandhe pādayugaṃ dattvā mamādhordhvaṃ nirīkṣaya ||
ap6.­28
sphuradvajraṃ tataḥ padmamadhyarandhre praveśaya |
dehi dhāpasahasraṃ tvaṃ lakṣyakoṭiṃ athārbudam ||
ap6.­29
madīye tridale padme māṃsavartisamanvite |
svavajraṃ tatra prakṣipya sukhaiś cittaṃ prapūjaya ||
ap6.­30
vāyu vāyu supadmaṃ me sārāt sāraṃ anuttaram |
vajrasyāgreṇa sambuddhaṃ raktaṃ bandhūkasaṃnibham ||
ap6.­31
bruvantīm iti tāṃ dhyāyan stabdhībhūyaikacetasā |
bhāvayet tajjakaṃ saukhyaṃ niścalo gāḍhacittataḥ ||
ap6.­32
tasyai293 pratyuttaraṃ dadyād vilamba tvaṃ priye kṣaṇam |
yāvat strīdehagaṃ rūpaṃ kṣaṇamātraṃ vicintaye ||
ap6.­33
strīm ekāṃ jananīṃ khalu trijagatāṃ satsaukhyadātrīṃ śivām |
vidveṣād iha nindayanti mukharā ye pāpakarmasthitāḥ ||
ap6.­34
te tenaiva durāvagāhanarake raudre sadā duḥkhitāḥ |
krandanto bahuvahnidagdhavapuṣas tiṣṭhanti kalpatrayam ||
ap6.­35
kiṃ tu vācyo guṇaḥ strīṇāṃ sarvasattvaparigrahaḥ |
kṛpā vā yadi vā rakṣā strīṇāṃ citte pratiṣṭhitā ||
ap6.­36
āstāṃ tāvat svajanaṃ parajanam api puṣṇāti bhikṣayā |
sā ced evaṃrūpā nānyathā strī vajrayoginyāḥ ||
ap6.­37
āstāṃ tu darśanaṃ tasyāḥ spṛṣṭighṛṣṭiṃ ca dūrataḥ |
yasyāḥ smaraṇamātreṇa tatkṣaṇaṃ labhyate sukham ||
ap6.­38
pañcaiva viṣayāḥ strīṇāṃ divyarūpeṇa saṃsthitāḥ
tām udvāhitāṃ kṛtvā sukhaṃ bhuñjanti mānavaḥ ||
ap6.­39
tasmād bho doṣanirmukte sarvasadguṇamaṇḍite |
puṇye puṇye mahāpuṇye prasādaṃ kuru me 'mbike ||
ap6.­40
tatas tāṃ gāḍhato dṛṣṭvā svauṣṭhaṃ dantena pīḍayet |
kurvan sītkārakaṃ yogī tāṃ ca kuryād vinagnikām ||
ap6.­41
kuryāt sukhodayaṃ bandhaṃ bandhaṃ ca dolā294 cālanam |
bandhaṃ jānugrahaṃ caiva bandhaṃ cāpy ūrumardanam ||
ap6.­42
pādacālanabandhaṃ ca bandhaṃ ca bhūmicāpitam295 |
bandhaṃ samadantakaṃ caiva bandhaṃ ca citrasaṃjñakam ||
ap6.­43
bhramarījālaṃ bandhaṃ ca yantrārūḍhordhvapadakam |
tathaiva kūrmabandhaṃ ca sarvatobhadram eva ca ||
ap6.­44
tatra paryaṅkamadhye tu striyaṃ cotkuṭukāsanāṃ |
kṛtvā bāhuyugaṃ skandhe svasya gāḍhena yojayet ||
ap6.­45
svasya bāhuyugaṃ tasyāḥ kakṣamadhyād vinirgatam |
padme prakṣipya vajraṃ tu khyāto bandhaḥ296 sukhodayaḥ ||
ap6.­46
dvayor hastayugaṃ veṇī baddham297 anyonyayogataḥ |
īṣac ca cālayed dvābhyāṃ khyāto 'yaṃ dolā298 cālanaḥ ||
ap6.­47
tasyā jānudvayaṃ svasya hṛdi kṛtvā tu sampuṭam |
dolā299 cālanakaranyāsād bandho 'yaṃ jānukagrahaḥ ||
ap6.­48
tasyāḥ pādatalau svasya corumūle niyojayet |
sukhodayakaranyāsād bandho 'yaṃ corumardanaḥ ||
ap6.­49
tasyāḥ pādatalau nābhau hṛdi pārśvadvaye 'pi hi |
dolācālanakaranyāsād bandho 'yaṃ pādacālanaḥ ||
ap6.­50
tasyāḥ pūladvayaṃ bhūmau saṃsthāpya kroḍakoṭare |
sukhodayakaranyāsād bandho 'yaṃ bhūmicāpitaḥ ||
ap6.­51
tām utkuṭukena saṃsthāpya dvipādaṃ ca prasārayet |
bandhaḥ samadantako jñeyaḥ pratyekaṃ cāpi sārayet ||
ap6.­52
tasyāḥ pādayugaṃ vaktraṃ300 kṛtvā vāme prayojayet |
savye 'pi saṃmukhe cāpi hṛdā pṛṣṭhaṃ spṛśet tataḥ ||
ap6.­53
hastādimardanaṃ kuryād bandho 'yam citrasaṃjñakaḥ |
punaḥ sukhodayaṃ kṛtvā tām uttānena pātayet ||
ap6.­54
savyena ca kareṇaiva vajraṃ padme niveśayet |
tasyā jānutale gṛhya kaphaṇy ūrdhvaṃ niyojayet ||
ap6.­55
anyonyaveṇihaste ca bhramarījālam iti smṛtam |
tasyāḥ pādayugaṃ dattvā svaskandhopari nirbharam ||
ap6.­56
yantrārūḍho hy ayaṃ bandho veśāveśaprayogataḥ |
tasyā vāmaṃ padaṃ skandhe savyaṃ vāmorumūlataḥ ||
ap6.­57
tasyāḥ savyaṃ padaṃ skandhe vāmaṃ savyorumūlataḥ |
ūrdhvapādo hy ayaṃ bandhaḥ satsukho duḥkhanāśanaḥ ||
ap6.­58
tasyāḥ pādatale vakṣomadhye same niyojayet |
bāhūbhyāṃ pīḍayej jānū kūrmabandha udāhṛtaḥ ||
ap6.­59
tasyāḥ pādatale netre karṇe mūrdhni niyojayet |
bandho 'yaṃ sarvatobhadraḥ sarvakāmasukhapradaḥ ||
ap6.­60
citraparyantakaṃ yāvat kuryāt sarvaṃ vicitrakam |
kroḍena pīdayet gāḍhaṃ caṇḍaroṣaṇayogataḥ ||
ap6.­61
cumbayec ca mukhaṃ tasyā yāvadicchaṃ punaḥ punaḥ |
unnāmya vadanaṃ dṛṣṭvā yathecchaṃ vākyakaṃ vadan ||
ap6.­62
jihvāṃ ca cūṣayet tasyāḥ pibel lālāṃ mukhodbhūtām301 |
bhakṣayec carcitaṃ dantamalaṃ saukhyaṃ vibhāvayet ||
ap6.­63
pīḍayed dantajihvām īṣad ādharapidhānike |
jihvayā nāsikārandhraṃ śodhayen netrakoṇikām ||
ap6.­64
dantakakṣāñ ca tajjātaṃ malaṃ sarvaṃ ca bhakṣayet |
mastaṃ netraṃ galaṃ karṇaṃ pārśvaṃ kakṣaṃ karaṃ stanam ||
ap6.­65
cumbayitvā nakhaṃ dadyāt tyaktvā netradvayaṃ striyāḥ |
mardayet pāṇinā cuñcaṃ cūṣayed daṃśayet tataḥ ||
ap6.­66
svayam uttānikāṃ kṛtvā cumbayet sundarodaram |
atraivāhaṃ sthitaḥ pūrvaṃ smṛtvā smṛtvā muhur muhuḥ ||
ap6.­67
hastena sparśayet padmaṃ vāyu sundaram idaṃ302 bruvan |
dadyāc cumbanakhaṃ tatra paśyen niṣkṛṣya pāṇinā ||
ap6.­68
ghrātvā gandhaṃ ca tad randhraṃ śodhayed rasanayā striyāḥ |
praviṣṭo 'haṃ yathānena niḥsṛtaś cāpy anekaśaḥ ||
ap6.­69
vadet tatredṛśaṃ vākyaṃ panthāyaṃ nāsikarajjuḥ303 |
ayam eva ṣaḍgateḥ panthā bhaved ajñānayogataḥ ||
ap6.­70
caṇḍaroṣaṇasiddhes tu bhaved jñānaprayogataḥ |
tataḥ padmagataṃ svedaṃ raktaṃ vā sukhasītkṛtaiḥ304 ||
ap6.­71
bhakṣayec ca mukhaṃ tasyāḥ sampaśyaṃs ca punaḥ punaḥ |
sa nakhaṃ corukaṃ kṛtvā mardayed dāsavat pādau ||
ap6.­72
mastake tryakṣaraṃ dadyād dhṛnmadhye laghumuṣṭikam |
tataś citrāt parān bandhān kuryād yogī samāhitaḥ ||
ap6.­73
icchayā dhyāyakaṃ305 tatra dadyāt saukhyaikamānasaḥ |
yathecchaṃ prakṣaren no vā kṣaret saukhyaikamānasaḥ ||
ap6.­74
kṣarite cālihet padmaṃ jānupātaprayogataḥ |
bhakṣayet padmagaṃ śukraṃ śonitaṃ cāpi jihvayā ||
ap6.­75
nāsayā nalikāyogāt pibet sāmarthyavṛddhaye |
prakṣālya jihvayā padmaṃ prajñām utthāpya cumbayet ||
ap6.­76
kroḍīkṛtya tataḥ paścād bhakṣayen matsyamāṃsakam |
pibed dugdhaṃ ca madyam vā punaḥ kāmapravṛddhaye ||
ap6.­77
śramaṃ jīrya tataḥ306 paścād icchāyatu307 sukhādibhiḥ |
punaḥ pūrvakrameṇaiva dvandvam anyonyam ārabhet ||
ap6.­78
anenābhyāsayogena sādhitaṃ ca mahāsukham |
caṇḍaroṣapadaṃ dhatte janmany atraiva yogavit ||
ap6.­79
rāgiṇāṃ siddhidānārthaṃ mayā yogaḥ prakāśitaḥ |
vāmajaṅghopari sthāpya savyajaṅghāṃ tu līlayā ||
ap6.­80
khyāto 'yaṃ sattvaparyaṅkaḥ sarvakāmasukhapradaḥ |
savyajaṅghopari sthāpya vāmajaṅghāṃ tu līlayā ||
ap6.­81
khyāto 'yaṃ padmaparyaṅkaḥ sarvakāmasukhapradaḥ |
padmaparyaṅkam ābadhya vāmajaṅghordhvam arpayet ||
ap6.­82
līlayā savyajaṅghāṃ tu vajraparyaṅkakaḥ smṛtaḥ |
bhūmau pādatale sthāpya same saṃmukhadīrghake ||
ap6.­83
sarvakāmapradaṃ jñeyaṃ caitad utkuṭukāsanam |
bhūmau pādatale sthāpya vakre tiryak sudīrghake ||
ap6.­84
ardhacandrāsanaṃ jñeyaṃ etat kāmasukhapradam |
tiryak jānuyugaṃ bhūmau gulphamadhye tu pūlakam ||
ap6.­85
kṛtvā dhanvāsanaṃ caitad divyakāmasukhapradam |
sattvaṃ padmaṃ tathā vajraṃ paryaṅkam iti kalpitam ||
ap6.­86
utkūṭukaṃ cārdhacandraṃ ca dhanv āsanam idaṃ matam |
ardhacandrāsanāsīnāṃ striyaṃ kṛtvā nirantaram ||
ap6.­87
patitvā saṃlihet padmaṃ gṛhṇan sulakṣatryakṣaram |
punar dhanvāsanaṃ kṛtvā svānanaṃ tadgudāntare ||
ap6.­88
pātayitvā gudaṃ tasyāḥ saṃlihen nāsayāpi ca |
tadutpannaṃ sukhaṃ dhyāyāc caṇḍaroṣaṇayogataḥ ||
ap6.­89
tato mukto bhavet yogī sarvasaṃkalpavarjitaḥ |
virāgarahitaṃ cittaṃ kṛtvā mātāṃ prakāmayet ||
ap6.­90
anurāgāt prāpyate puṇyaṃ virāgād agham āpyate |
na virāgāt paraṃ pāpaṃ na puṇyaṃ sukhataḥ param ||
ap6.­91
tataś ca kāmaje saukhye cittaṃ kuryāt samāhitam308 ||
ap6.­92

atha bhagavatī pramuditahṛdayā bhagavantaṃ namaskṛtya abhivandya caivam āha || bho bhagavan kiṃ nṛṇām eva kevalam ayaṃ sādhanopāyo 'nyeṣām api vā ||

bhagavān āha |
atrānuraktā ye tu sarvadikṣu vyavasthitāḥ |
devāsurā narā nāgās te 'pi siddhyanti sādhakāḥ ||
ap6.­93

athaivaṃ śrutvā maheśvarādayo devā gaurīlakṣmīśacīratyādidevatīṃ gṛhitvā bhāvayitum ārabdhaḥ | atha tatkṣaṇaṃ sarve tallavaṃ309 tanmuhurtakaṃ caṇḍaroṣaṇapadaṃ prāptā vicaranti mahītale | tatra maheśvaro vajraśaṅkaratvena siddhaḥ | vāsudevo vajranārāyaṇatvena | devendro vajrapāṇitvena | kāmadevo vajrānaṅgatvena | evam pramukhā gaṅgānadībālukāsamā devaputrāḥ siddhāḥ ||


ap6.­94
pañcakāmaguṇopetāḥ sarvasattvārthakārakāḥ |
nānāmūrtidharāḥ sarve bhūtā māyāvino jināḥ ||
ap6.­95
yathā paṅkodbhavaṃ padmaṃ paṅkadoṣair na lipyate |
tathā rāganayodbhūtā lipyante na ca doṣakaiḥ ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre niṣpannayogapaṭalaḥ ṣaṣṭhaḥ ||
ap7.

Chapter A7

ap7.­1
atha bhagavaty āha |
maithunaṃ kurvato jantor mahān syāt pariśramaḥ |
tasya viśramaṇaṃ nātha jantvarthe vaktum arhasi ||
ap7.­2
bhagavān āha |
straiṇyaṃ saukhyaṃ samālambya svapratyakṣe nirodhitam |
bhuñjīta matsyamāṃsaṃ tu piben madyaṃ samāhitaḥ ||
ap7.­3
anyabhakṣyaṃ yathālabdhaṃ bhaktādiṃ310 kṣīranīrakam |
strīṇāṃ prathamato dadyāt tadutsṛṣṭaṃ311 tu bhakṣayet ||
ap7.­4
tasyā utsṛṣṭapattre312 tu bhoktavyaṃ ca nirantaram |
tasyāś cācamanaṃ nīraṃ padmaprakṣālanaṃ pibet ||
ap7.­5
guda313 prakṣālanaṃ gṛhya mukhādiṃ kṣālayed vratī |
vāntaṃ tu bhakṣayet tasyā bhakṣayec ca catuḥsamam ||
ap7.­6
pibec ca yonijaṃ vāri bhakṣayet kheṭapiṇḍakam |
yathā saṃkāram āsādya vṛkṣo bhoti phalādhikaḥ ||
ap7.­7
tathaivāśucibhāgena314 mānavaḥ sukhasatphalaḥ |
na jarā nāpi rogaś ca na mṛtyus tasya dehinaḥ ||
ap7.­8
sevayed aśuciṃ yo 'sau niryogo 'pi sa sidhyati |
bhakṣyaṃ vā yadi vābhakṣyaṃ sarvathaiva na kalpayet ||
ap7.­9
kāryākāryaṃ tathā gamyam agamyaṃ caiva yogavit |
na puṇyaṃ ca vā pāpaṃ ca315 svargaṃ mokṣaṃ na kalpayet ||
ap7.­10
sahajānandaikamūrtis tu tiṣṭhed yogī samāhitaḥ |
evaṃ yogayuto316 yogī yadi syād bhāvanāparaḥ ||
ap7.­11
caṇḍaroṣaikayogena tad317 āhaṃkāradhārakaḥ |
yadi brahmaśataṃ hanyād api pāpair na lipyate ||
ap7.­12
tasmād evaṃvidhaṃ nāthaṃ bhāvayec caṇḍaroṣaṇam |
yenaiva narakaṃ yānti jantavo raudrakarmaṇā ||
ap7.­13
sopāyena tu tenaiva mokṣaṃ yānti na saṃśayaḥ |
manaḥpūrvagamaṃ sarvaṃ pāpapuṇyaṃ idaṃ matam ||
ap7.­14
manasaḥ kalpanākāraṃ gatisthānādibheditam |
viṣaṃ nāmantritaṃ yadvad bhakṣaṇād āyuṣaḥ kṣayaḥ ||
ap7.­15
tad eva mantritaṃ kṛṭvā sukham āyuś ca vardhate |
atha tasmin kṣaṇe devī prajñāpāramitā varā ||
ap7.­16
karttikarparakaravyagrā caṇḍaroṣaṇamudrayā |
vajracaṇḍī mahākruddhā vaded īdṛśam uttamam ||
ap7.­17
madīyaṃ rūpakaṃ dhyātvā kṛtvāhaṃkāram uttamam |
yadi brahmaśataṃ hanyāt sāpi pāpair na lipyate ||
ap7.­18
madīyaṃ rūpam ādhāya mahākrodhaikacetasā |
mārayen matsyapakṣīṃś ca yoginī na ca lipyate ||
ap7.­19
nirdayāś cañcalāḥ kruddhā māraṇārthārthacintakāḥ318 |
striyaḥ sarvā hi prāyeṇa tāsām arthe prakāśitam ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre dehaprīṇanapaṭalaḥ saptamaḥ ||
ap8.

Chapter A8

ap8.­1
atha bhagavān bhagavatīṃ pañcamaṇḍalair namaskṛtyāha |
tvadīyaṃ yoginā rūpaṃ jñātavyaṃ tu kathaṃ priye |
bhagavatī cārādhitā kena yogināṃ319 vā bhaviṣyati ||
ap8.­2
atha bhagavaty āha |
yāvad dhi dṛśyate loke strīrūpaṃ bhuvanatraye |
tan madīyaṃ mataṃ rūpaṃ nīcānīcakulaṃ gatam ||
ap8.­3
devī cāsurī caiva yakṣiṇī rākṣasī tathā |
nāginī bhūtinīkanyā kinnarī mānuṣī tathā ||
ap8.­4
gandharvī nārakī caiva tiryakkanyātha pretikā |
brāhmaṇī kṣatriṇī vaiśyā śudrī320 cātyantavistarā ||
ap8.­5
kāyasthī321 rājaputrī ca śiṣṭinī kara-uttinī |
vaṇijinī vāriṇī veśyā ca tariṇī322 carmakāriṇī ||
ap8.­6
kulatriṇī323 hatriṇī ḍombī caṇḍālī śavariṇī tathā |
dhobinī śauṇḍiṇī gandhavāriṇī karmakāriṇī ||
ap8.­7
nāpitī324 naṭinī kaṃsakāriṇī svarṇakāriṇī |
kaivartī khaṭakī325 kuṇḍakāriṇī cāpi mālinī ||
ap8.­8
kāpālinī śaṃkhinī caiva varuḍinī ca kemālinī |
gopālī kāṇḍa326 kārī ca kocinī ca śilākuṭī ||
ap8.­9
thapatinī keśakārī ca sarvajātisamāvṛtā |
mātā ca bhaginī bhāryā māmikā bhāgineyikā ||
ap8.­10
khuṭṭikā ca svasā caiva anyā ca sarvajātinī |
vratinī yoginī caiva raṇḍā cāpi tapasvinī ||
ap8.­11
ityādibahavaḥ sarvāḥ striyo madrūpasaṃgatāḥ |
sthitā vai sarvasattvārthaṃ svasvarūpeṇa niścitāḥ ||
ap8.­12
tāsām eva yathālābhaṃ cumbanāliṅganādibhiḥ |
vajrapadmasamāyogād yogināṃ bhonti sevitāḥ ||
ap8.­13
sevitās tu striyaḥ siddhiṃ sarvasattvahitaiṣiṇām327 |
dadanti kṣaṇamātreṇa tasmāt saṃsevayet striyam ||
ap8.­14
striyaḥ svargaḥ striyo dharmaḥ striya eva paraṃ tapaḥ |
striyo buddhaḥ striyaḥ saṅghaḥ prajñāpāramitā striyaḥ ||
ap8.­15
pañcavarṇaprabhedena kalpitā bhinnanāmataḥ |
nīlavarṇā tu yā nārī dveṣavajrīti kīrtitā ||
ap8.­16
śvetagaurā tu yā nārī mohavajrī hi sā matā |
pītavarṇā tu yā nārī sā devī piśunavajrikā ||
ap8.­17
raktagaurā tu yā nārī rāgavajrī prakīrtitā |
śyāmavarṇā tu yā nārī īrṣyāvajrīti kathyate ||
ap8.­18
ekaiva bhagavatī prajñā pañcarūpeṇa saṃsthitā |
puṣpadhūpādibhir vastraiḥ padyagadyāṅgaśobhanaiḥ ||
ap8.­19
sambhāṣaṇanamaskāraiḥ sampuṭāñjalidhāraṇaiḥ |
darśanaiḥ sparśanaiḥ cāpi smaraṇais tadvacaḥkaraiḥ ||
ap8.­20
cumbanāliṅganair nityaṃ pūjayed vajrayoginīṃ |
śaktau kāyena kartavyam aśaktau vākyacetasā ||
ap8.­21
tenāhaṃ pūjitā tuṣṭā sarvasiddhiṃ dadāmi ca |
sarvastrīdeharūpaṃ tu tyaktvā nānyā bhavāmy aham ||
ap8.­22
tyaktvā strīpūjanaṃ nānyaṃ madīyaṃ syāt prapūjanam |
anenārādhanenāhaṃ tuṣṭā sādhakasiddhaye ||
ap8.­23
sarvatra sarvadā nityaṃ tasya dṛṣṭipathaṃ gatā |
madīyāśeṣarūpeṇa dhyātvā svastrīṃ ca kāmayet ||
ap8.­24
vajrapadmasamāyogāt tasyāhaṃ bodhidāyinī |
tasmāt sarvaprakāreṇa mamārādhanatatparaḥ ||
ap8.­25
caurīm api yadā kuryād yadi vā prāṇimāraṇam |
vaded vātha mṛṣāvākyaṃ bhañjayet pratimādikam ||
ap8.­26
sāṅghikaṃ bhakṣayed vātha staupikaṃ paradravyakam |
na pāpair lipyate yogī mamārādhanatatparaḥ ||
ap8.­27
nakhena cūrṇayed yūkāṃ vastrasthām api mārayet |
anenaiva prayogeṇa māṃ samārādhayed vratī ||
ap8.­28
na kuryāc ca bhayaṃ pāpe nārakādau ca durgatau |
bhayaṃ kuryāt tu lokasya yāvac328 chaktir na labhyate ||
ap8.­29
na pāpaṃ vidyate kiṃcid na puṇyaṃ kiṃcid asti hi |
lokānāṃ cittarakṣāyai pāpapuṇyavyavasthitiḥ ||
ap8.­30
cittamātraṃ yataḥ sarvaṃ kṣaṇamātraṃ ca tatsthitiḥ |
narakaṃ gacchate ko 'sau ko 'sau svargaṃ prayāti hi ||
ap8.­31
yathaivātaṅkato mṛtyuṃ svasaṃkalpaviṣaprabhavam329 |
viṣābhave 'pi saṃyāti tathā svargam adhogatim ||
ap8.­32
evaṃbhūtaparijñānād nirvāṇaṃ cāpyate budhaiḥ |
nirvāṇaṃ śūnyarūpaṃ tu pradīpasyeva vātataḥ ||
ap8.­33
tacchede ca pacet so 'pi na bodhipadam aśnute |
tasmāt sarvaṃ parityajya mām evārādhayed vratī ||
ap8.­34
dadāmi kṣaṇamātreṇa caṇḍasiddhiṃ na saṃśayaḥ ||
ap8.­35
atha bhagavān bhagavatīṃ prajñāpāramitām āha |
kim ākāro bhavec caṇḍas tasya siddhis tu kīdṛśī ||
ap8.­36
bhagavaty āha |
pañcavarṇaprabhedena yoginyo yāḥ prakīrtitāḥ |
tāsāṃ ca svasvabhartāraḥ pañcavarṇaprabhedataḥ ||
ap8.­37
caṇḍāś ca sarva evaite yoginyā tu mayoditāḥ |
nīlavarṇas tu yo bhartā sa ca nīlācalaḥ smṛtaḥ ||
ap8.­38
śvetagauro hi yo bhartā sa śvetācalasaṃjñakaḥ |
pītavarṇo hi yo bhartā sa khyātaḥ pītakācalaḥ ||
ap8.­39
raktagauro hi yo bhartā sa raktācala udāhṛtaḥ |
śyāmavarṇo hi yo bhartā sa khyātaḥ śyāmakācalaḥ ||
ap8.­40
eka eva bhavec caṇḍaḥ pañcarūpeṇa saṃsthitaḥ |
eṣa caṇḍaḥ samākhyato 'sya siddhir dṛḍhatvataḥ ||
ap8.­41
yāvad ākāśaparyantaṃ divyarūpeṇa saṃsthitiḥ |
caṇḍasiddhir yathaivoktā tathā caṇḍī prasidhyati ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre svarūpapaṭalo 'aṣṭamaḥ ||
ap9.

Chapter A9

ap9.­1
atha bhagavaty āha | kathaṃ bhagavan prajñopāyayor ahaṃkāro bhāvanīyaḥ |
bhagavān āha |
yogī strīm agrataḥ kṛtvānyonyadṛṣṭitatparaḥ |
ṛjukāyaṃ samādāya dhyāyed ekāgramānasaḥ ||
ap9.­2
catuṣkāyasvabhāvatvād bhedo nāsti manāg api |
vinā bodhaṃ punar bhedaḥ prajñopāyayor mataḥ ||
ap9.­3
mṛtyur evocyate dharmaḥ sambhogas tv antarābhavaḥ |
nirmāṇaḥ ṣaḍgate rūpaṃ kāmabhogo mahāsukhaḥ ||
ap9.­4
catuṣkāyasvabhāvo 'yaṃ puṃrūpas tu tridhātuke |
catuṣkāyasvabhāvā ca strīrūpā tu tridhātuke ||
ap9.­5
pumān eva bhaved buddhaś catuṣkāyasvabhāvataḥ |
prajñāpāramitā strī ca sarvadikṣu vyavasthitā ||
ap9.­6
sa tv itthaṃ ahaṃkāraṃ kuryāt siddho hy ahaṃ punaḥ |
caṇḍaroṣasvarūpeṇa nijarūpeṇa saṃsthitaḥ ||
ap9.­7
siddhātmakāminī caṇḍīrūpam ādhāya sarvataḥ |
sādaraṃ bhāvayed itthaṃ dīrghakālaṃ tu tattvavit ||
ap9.­8
sarvakarma parityajya vāmāsevaikatatparaḥ |
tiṣṭhet saukhyaikacittena yāvat siddhir na labhyate ||
ap9.­9
siddhilabdho yadā yogī svacchāpratigho bhavet |
dṛśyate naiva lokais tu vāyucittavijṛmbhitaḥ ||
ap9.­10
sarvajñaḥ sarvago vyāpī sarvakleśavivarjitaḥ |
na rogo na jarā tasya mṛtyus tasya na vidyate ||
ap9.­11
viṣaṃ na kramate tasya na jalaṃ nāpi pāvakaḥ |
na śastraṃ śatrusaṃghās tu sambhavanti kadācana ||
ap9.­12
manaḥkāṅkṣitamātreṇa sarvakāmasamudbhavaḥ |
tatkṣaṇaṃ bhoti cāyatnaiś cintāmaṇisamo bhavet ||
ap9.­13
lokadhātusamasteṣu yatra yatraiva saṃsthitaḥ |
tasya tatra vimānāni jāyante sarvakāmitaiḥ ||
ap9.­14
tasya divyastriyo ramyā rūpayauvanamaṇḍitāḥ |
bhaviṣyanti na saṃdeho yāvantaḥ svargatārakāḥ ||
ap9.­15
brahmaviṣṇumaheśā ye śakrānaṅgādayaḥ surāḥ |
kiṃkarā bhonti sarve ca prāṇinaḥ ṣaḍgatisthitāḥ ||
ap9.­16
yathaiva yoginaḥ siddhir yoginyās tu tathaiva hi |
narā vajradharākārā yoṣito vajrayoṣitaḥ ||
ap9.­17
atha bhagavaty āha | kathaṃ bhagavan dehe prajñopāyayogena sukhaṃ mahad utpadyate |
bhagavan āha |
lalanā prajñāsvabhāvena vāme330 nāḍī vyavasthitā |
rasanā copāyarūpeṇa dakṣiṇe samavasthitā ||
ap9.­18
lalanārasanayor madhye avadhūtī vyavasthitā |
avadhūtyāṃ yadā vāyuḥ śukreṇa samarasīkṛtaḥ ||
ap9.­19
śīraḥsandheḥ pated vajrarandhreṇa strībhagāntare |
prajñopāyasamāyogāc caṇḍālī nābhisaṃsthitā ||
ap9.­20
dīpavaj jvalate tena drāvyate śukram uttamam |
tenotpadyate saukhyaṃ svalpaṃ svalpaprayogataḥ ||
ap9.­21
tan mahac ca mahāyogāt tac ca vastusvabhāvataḥ331 |
tat sukhaṃ yena baddhaṃ syān nityaṃ abhyāsayogataḥ ||
ap9.­22
sa śrīmāṃś caṇḍaroṣaḥ syād asminn eva hi janmani ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre dhyānapaṭalo navamaḥ ||
ap10.

Chapter A10

ap10.­1

atha bhagavaty āha | kiṃ bhagavan strīvyatirekeṇāpi śakyate sādhayituṃ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇapadam utāho na śakyate |

bhagavān āha | na śakyate devi |
bhagavaty āha | kiṃ bhagavan sukhānudayān na śakyate |
bhagavān āha |
na sukhodayamātreṇa labhyate bodhir uttamā |
sukhaviśeṣodayād eva prāpyate sā ca nānyathā ||
ap10.­2
tac ca kāryaṃ vinā naiva kāraṇenaiva jāyate |
kāraṇaṃ ca striyā yogo na cānyo hi kadācana ||
ap10.­3
sarvāsām eva māyānāṃ strīmāyaiva praśasyate |
tām evātikramed yo 'sau na siddhiṃ so 'dhigacchati ||
ap10.­4
tasmān na strīviyogo 'yaṃ kartavyas tu kadācana |
evaṃ yadi bhaved duḥkhaṃ mṛtyur vā bandhanaṃ bhayam ||
ap10.­5
sahyaṃ tat sarvam evedaṃ striyaṃ naiva tu saṃtyajet |
yasmād eva striyaḥ sarvāḥ sukhair buddhatvaprāpikāḥ ||
ap10.­6
nirlajjāś cañcalā dhṛṣṭā nityaṃ kāmaparāyaṇāḥ |
siddhim etā dadanty eva sarvabhāvena sevitāḥ ||
ap10.­7
strīṇām rūpaṃ tu kiṃ vācyaṃ mriyante cāpi premataḥ |
pater eva viyogena kiṃ vaktavyaṃ ataḥ param ||
ap10.­8
tasmāt sarvāḥ striyo devyaḥ sarvathaiva prakalpayet |
manasaḥ kalpitāś cāpi kāṣṭhapāṣāṇakādibhiḥ ||
ap10.­9
strīṇāṃ ca pumān devo devatā strī narasya hi |
anyonyaṃ bhavet pūjā vajrapadmaprayogataḥ ||
ap10.­10
nānyaṃ pūjayed devaṃ sādhiṣṭhānam api svayam |
tasmād yogī kṛpāviṣṭo maṇḍalīkṛtya-m-agrataḥ ||
ap10.­11
upaveśya striyaṃ tatra prajñāpāramitākṛtim |
puṣpeṇābhyarcayen nityaṃ dīpadhūpādibhis tathā ||
ap10.­12
paścād vandanāṃ kuryāt pañcamaṇḍalayogataḥ |
tataḥ pradakṣiṇaṃ kuryāc caṇḍīpūjā kṛtā bhavet ||
ap10.­13
strī pūjayet puruṣaṃ sādaraṃ bhakticetasā |
kuryād evaṃvidhāṃ pūjām anyonyaṃ coktaṃ jinaiḥ ||
ap10.­14
nindayec ca striyaṃ naiva prārthite pariharen na ca |
vaktavyaṃ madhuraṃ vākyaṃ dātavyaṃ cānurūpataḥ ||
ap10.­15
vandayet sarvabhāvena yathā duṣṭo na budhyate |
tyajen naiva striyaṃ kvāpi śrutvedaṃ buddhabhāṣitam ||
ap10.­16
anyathātvaṃ kared yas tu sa pāpī narakaṃ aśnute |
maraṇam apy anyathā siddhaṃ strīviyogena kiṃ kṛtam ||
ap10.­17
tapasā sidhyate naiva caṇḍaroṣaṇasādhanam |
niṣphalaṃ mohajālena bādhyate nirmalaṃ manaḥ ||
ap10.­18
kāmaṃ na varjayet kāmī mithyājīvas tu jāyate |
mithyayā jīvanāt pāpaṃ pāpāt tu narake gatiḥ332 ||
ap10.­19
labhate · antakālaṃ tu mithyājīvī na saṃśayaḥ |
ata eva sādhyate siddhiḥ kāmenaiva jinātmajaiḥ ||
ap10.­20
pañcakāmāṃs tathā tyaktvā tapasātmānaṃ na pīḍayet |
rūpaṃ paśyed yathālabdhaṃ śṛṇuyāc chabdam eva ca ||
ap10.­21
gandhasya jighraṇaṃ kuryād bhakṣayed rasam uttamam |
sparśasya sparśanaṃ kuryāt pañcakāmopasevanam ||
ap10.­22
bhavec chīghrataraṃ buddhaś caṇḍaroṣaikatatparaḥ |
nātaḥ paraṃ vañcanāsti na ca moho 'py ataḥ param ||
ap10.­23
mānuṣyaṃ yauvanaṃ sarvaṃ333 strīsukhaṃ nopabhogitam |
niṣphalaṃ vāpi334 dṛśyaṃ te vyayaṃ kṛtvā mahattaram ||
ap10.­24
sevanti kāminīṃ nityaṃ kāmamātraparāyaṇāḥ |
caṇḍaroṣapadaṃ dṛṣṭvā yoṣidyonisamāśritam ||
ap10.­25
tyaktvā yānti kathaṃ nidrāṃ bhojanaṃ hāsyam eva ca |
lokakaukṛtyanāśārthaṃ māyādevīsutaḥ sudhīḥ ||
ap10.­26
caturaśītisahasrāṇi tyaktvā cāntaḥpuraṃ punaḥ |
gatvā nirañjanātīraṃ buddhasiddhiprakāśakaḥ ||
ap10.­27
yāto mārān nirākṛtya na caivaṃ paramārthataḥ |
yasmād antaḥpure buddhaḥ siddho gopānvitaḥ sukhī ||
ap10.­28
vajrapadmasamāyogāt satsukhaṃ labhyate335 yataḥ |
sukhena prāpyate bodhiḥ sukhaṃ na strīviyogataḥ ||
ap10.­29
viyogaḥ kriyate yas tu lokakaukṛtyahānaye |
yena yenaiva te lokā yānti buddhavineyatām ||
ap10.­30
tena tenaiva rūpeṇa māyāvī nṛtyate jinaḥ |
sarvasūtrābhidharmeṇa kṛtvā nindāṃ tu yoṣitām ||
ap10.­31
nānāśikṣāpadaṃ bhāṣet tattvagopanabhāṣayā |
nirvāṇaṃ darśayec cāpi pañcaskandhavināśataḥ ||
ap10.­32
atha bhagavatī prajñāpāramitāha | ko bhagavan māyādevīsutaḥ kā ca gopā |
bhagavān āha |
māyādevīsutaś cāhaṃ caṇḍaroṣaṇatāṃ gataḥ |
tvam eva bhagavatī gopā prajñāpāramitātmikā ||
ap10.­33
yāvantas tu striyaḥ sarvāś tvadrūpeṇaiva tā matāḥ |
madrūpeṇa ca puṃsas tu sarva eva prakīrtitāḥ ||
ap10.­34
dvidhābhāvagataṃ caitat prajñopāyātmakaṃ jagat ||
ap10.­35
atha bhagavaty āha | kathaṃ bhagavan śrāvakādayo hi striyaṃ dūṣayanti |
bhagavān āha |
kāmadhātusthitāḥ sarve khyātā ye śrāvakādayaḥ |
mokṣamārgaṃ na jānanti striyaṃ paśyanti sarvadā ||
ap10.­36
saṃnidhānaṃ bhaved yatra sulabhaṃ336 kuṅkumādikam |
na tatrārghaṃ samāpnoti dūrasthasya337 mahārghatā ||
ap10.­37
anādyajñānayogena śraddhāhīnās tv amī janāḥ |
cittaṃ na kurvate tattve mayāpy etat pragopitam ||
ap10.­38
tathāpy atra kalau kāle koṭimadhye 'tha kaścit |
ekaikasaṃkhyātaḥ sattvaḥ śraddhāyatnaparāyaṇaḥ ||
ap10.­39
tasyārthe bhāśitaṃ sarvaṃ śīghrabodhiprasiddhaye ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre strīpraśaṃsāpaṭalo daśamaḥ ||
ap11.

Chapter A11

ap11.­1
atha bhagavaty āha | kiṃ tvaṃ bhagavan sarāgo 'si vītarāgo vā |
bhagavān āha |
sarvo 'haṃ sarvavyāpī ca sarvakṛt sarvanāśakaḥ |
sarvarūpadharo buddhaḥ kartā hartā prabhuḥ sukhī ||
ap11.­2
yene yenaiva rūpeṇa sattvā yānti vineyatām |
tena tenaiva rūpeṇa sthito 'haṃ lokahetave ||
ap11.­3
kvacid buddhaḥ kvacit siddhaḥ kvacid dharmo 'tha saṃghakaḥ |
kvacit pretaḥ kvacit tiryak kvacin nārakarūpakaḥ ||
ap11.­4
kvacid devo 'suraś caiva kvacin mānuṣarūpakaḥ |
kvacit sthāvararūpo 'haṃ viśvarūpī na saṃśayaḥ ||
ap11.­5
ahaṃ strī puruṣaś cāpi napuṃsakarūpaḥ kvacit |
kvacid rāgī kvacid dveṣī kvacin mohī śuciḥ kvacit ||
ap11.­6
kvacic cāśucirūpo 'haṃ cittarūpeṇa saṃsthitaḥ |
madīyaṃ dṛśyate cittam anyat kiṃcin na vidyate ||
ap11.­7
vastvavastuprabhedo 'haṃ janyo 'haṃ janako 'pi hi |
vighno 'ham ahaṃ siddhiḥ sarvarūpeṇa saṃsthitaḥ ||
ap11.­8
ahaṃ jātir ahaṃ mṛtyur ahaṃ vyādhir jarāpy aham |
ahaṃ puṇyaṃ ahaṃ pāpaṃ tatkarmaphalaṃ tv aham ||
ap11.­9
jagad buddhamayaṃ sarvam idaṃ rūpaṃ mamaiva ca |
jñātavyaṃ samarasākārair yoginā tattvacintayā ||
ap11.­10
atha bhagavaty āha | kiṃ bhagavaṃs tavaivedaṃ rūpam |
bhagavān āha |
tavāpy evaṃvidhaṃ rūpaṃ yathā sarvaṃ vibhāṣitam |
tvayā vyāptam idaṃ sarvaṃ jagat sthāvarajaṅgamam ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre viśvapaṭala ekādaśaḥ ||
ap12.

Chapter A12

ap12.­1
atha bhagavaty āha |
mantrāṇāṃ sādhanaṃ brūhi śāntikaṃ pauṣṭikaṃ tathā |
vaśyākṛṣṭiprayogaṃ ca māraṇoccāṭanādikam ||
ap12.­2
viṣanāśaṃ vyādhināśaṃ vahnikhaḍgādistambhanam |
saṃgrāme vijayaṃ cāpi pāṇḍityam athottamam ||
ap12.­3
yakṣiṇīsādhanaṃ ceṭaṃ dūtabhūtādi­sādhanam |
sāmarthyam anekavijñānaṃ niścitaṃ me vada prabho ||
ap12.­4
atha bhagavān āha |
caṇḍaroṣaṇasamādhistho mantrasādhanam ārabhet |
prathamaṃ sādhayet sārdhadaśa­varṇātmakaṃ hṛdam ||
ap12.­5
mūlamantram iti khyātaṃ sarva­mantra­prasādhakam |
likhitaṃ tiṣṭhate yatra tatra svasti bhavet punaḥ ||
ap12.­6
dhārayed vācayed yas tu tasya pāpaṃ samūlitam |
smaraṇād evāsya mantrasya mārā yānti diśo daśa ||
ap12.­7
tasmāt sarvaprayatnena mantram etat prasādhayet ||
ap12.­8

atha tasmin kṣaṇe sarva­bhūta­preta­vyāḍa­yakṣa­kumbhāṇḍa­mahoragādayo duṣṭasattvāḥ prapalāyitāḥ, sarvavyādhayo bhītāḥ, sarve ca grahādayo dahyante, mantra­raśmi­prabhāvataḥ sarvāś ca siddhayo 'bhimukhībhūtāḥ ||

ap12.­9

athāsya sādhanaṃ bhavati | lakṣaṃ japet | pūrvasevā kṛtā bhavet | tataḥ kṛṣṇa­pratipadam ārabhya pratidinaṃ trisandhyaṃ japed yāvat paurṅamāsīm | tato 'nte sakalāṃ rātriṃ japen mahatīṃ pūjāṃ kṛtvā sandhyātaḥ prabhṛti yāvat sūryodayam | tato 'yaṃ mantraḥ siddho bhavati | tataḥ prabhṛti sarvakarmāṇi karoti ||

ap12.­10

atha bhagavataḥ sādhanaṃ bhavati | paṭe bhagavantaṃ likhāpayet | pūrvavac caturasramaṇḍala­madhye daśātmakaṃ yathādhimokṣataḥ | tasyāgrataḥ kṛṣṇa­pratipadam ārabhya trisandhyaṃ sahasram ekaikaṃ japet | tato 'nte paurṅamāsyāṃ yathāvibhavataḥ pūjāṃ kṛtvā sandhyākālāt prabhṛti sūryodayaṃ yāvat | tato bhayāny utpadyante | na bhetavyam | tvaritatvaritaṃ japet | tato bhagavān svayam evāgacchati | tato 'rghaṃ tasya pādayor dattvā patitvā sthātavyam ||

ap12.­11

tato bhagavān āha | bho te kiṃ varam dadāmīti | sādhakena vaktavyam | buddhatvaṃ me dehīti | tato bhagavāṃs tasya śarīre praviśati | praviṣṭamātre dviraṣṭa­varṣā­kṛtiḥ ṣaḍabhijñas trayodaśa­bhūmīśvaro divyavimānacārī śata­sahasrāpsarogaṇa­maṇḍitaḥ kāmarūpī sarvajño bhagavatsadṛśo bhavati ||

ap12.­12

athavā khaḍgāñjana­gulikā­pādukā­pādaleparājya­kāmabhogaiśvarya­vidyā­dhanakavitva­pāṇḍitya­yakṣa­yakṣiṇī­rasa­sparśa­dhātu­vādādikaṃ yathābhimataṃ prārthayet | tat sarvaṃ bhagavān dadāti ||

ap12.­13

athavā paṭa ekallavīraṃ likhāpayitvā pūrvavat sādhayet | atraikallavīrapaṭe kṛṣṇācalo dveṣavajryāliṅgitaḥ, śvetācalo mohavajryā, pītācalaḥ piśunavajryā, raktācalo rāgavajryā, śyāmācala īrṣyāvajryāliṅgito likhāpayitavyaḥ | athavā prajñārahitaḥ kevalo bhagavān kāryaḥ ||

ap12.­14

athavā bhagavatī pañcānāṃ madhya ekā kāryā | tata ātmānaṃ tasyāḥ patirūpeṇa dhyātvā pūrvavat sādhanīyā | athavā svastriyaṃ devīrūpeṇa dhyātvā sādhayet | siddhā satī buddhatvam api dadāti kiṃ punar anyāḥ siddhīḥ ||

ap12.­15

athavā pratyālīḍhapadaṃ khaḍgapāśadharaṃ sādhayet | athavā sattvaparyaṅkiṇaṃ khaḍgapāśakarābhyāṃ338 kroḍīkṛtasvābhaprajñaṃ sādhayet sahaja­caṇḍamahā­roṣaṇam | pūrvavat siddhim | evaṃ bhagavataḥ paṭasiddhiḥ | athavā dārvādi­kṛta­pratimā­sādhanam apy evam eva kartavyam ||

ap12.­16

atha khaḍgasādhane manas tadā puṣye jātilohamayaṃ sāraṃ ca kāṣṭhamayaṃ vā yathābhimataṃ pañcagavyena prakṣālya sarvagandhaiḥ samālambhya pūrvavad dvābhyāṃ karābhyāṃ parigṛhya trisandhyaṃ māsam ekaṃ japet | māsānte mahatīṃ pūjāṃ kṛtvā sakalāṃ rātriṃ japet | prabhāte jvalitaḥ | khaḍga­vidyādharo bhavati dviraṣṭa­varṣākṛtir ākuñcita­kuṇḍalakeśaḥ | āsaṃsāraṃ pañcakāmair vilasati ||

ap12.­17

evaṃ vajracakratriśūlādīn sādhayet | evaṃ tāmrādimayaṃ pāśaṃ sādhayet | evaṃ paṭapādukayajñopa­vītavastra­cchatraṃ ca prajñā­pāramitā­pustaka­tantra­pustakādīn sādhayet | evaṃ paṭahamardala­vīṇādīn sādhayet | evaṃ sauvarṇamayaṃ yakṣaṃ jambhala­māṇi­bhadra­pūrṇa­bhadracibi­kuṇḍali­prabhṛtīn sādhayet | sarva ājñāṃ339 sampādayanti ||

ap12.­18

evaṃ veṇumayaṃ gandharvaṃ sādhayet, vālmīkamṛṇmayaṃ garuḍaṃ, devadārumayān devān brahma­viṣṇu­maheśvarendra­kāma­devādīn, śmaśānāṅgāralikhitaṃ rākṣasaṃ, dagdha­gaḍamatsyakṣāralikhitaṃ pretaṃ, madanamayaṃ manuṣyaṃ, hasti­danta­mayaṃ gaṇapatiṃ, śākhoṭaka­kāṣṭha­mayaṃ pīlupālādi­piśācaṃ, pravālamatsyakṣāralikhitaṃ gaurīcauryādi­ḍākinīṃ, manuṣyāsthimayaṃ rāma­deva­kāma­devādi­vetālaṃ, nāga­keśara­kāṣṭha­mayaṃ vāsukyādināgaṃ nāginīṃ ca, aśoka­kāṣṭha­mayāṃ hārītī-surasundarī-naṭṭā-ratipriyā-śyāmā-naṭī-padminī-anurāginī-candrakāntā-brahmaduhitā-vadhū-kāmeśvarī-revatī-ālokinī-naravīrā-ādiyakṣiṇīṃ sādhayet ||

ap12.­19

vaṭakāṣṭhamayīṃ340 śrīdevīṃ rājānaṃ ca devadārumayaṃ tilottamā-śaśidevī-kāñcanamālā-kuṇḍalahāriṇī-ratnamālā-ārambhā-urvaśī-śrībhūṣaṇī-ratī-śacī-ādyapsarogaṇaṃ sādhayet | evaṃ sūryaṃ candraṃ maṅgalaṃ budhaṃ bṛhaspatiṃ śukraṃ śanaiścaraṃ rāhuṃ ketuṃ ca navagraham | evaṃ lokeśvara­vajrapāṇi­mañjuśrī­prabhṛtīn bodhisattvān | evaṃ vipaśyīśikhīprabhṛtīn buddhān sādhayet | evam aparājitādīn bhūtān | evaṃ yamāryādīn dūtān | evaṃ vajrakaṃkālādīn ceṭān | evaṃ sarvasattvān strīpuruṣān sādhayet | sarva ājñākarā bhavanti ||

ap12.­20

athaikavāre na sidhyati tadā punar dvitīyaṃ vāraṃ kuryāt | na tathā cet tadā tṛtīyaṃ vāram ārabhet | na tathāpi cet pūrvakṛtamahadaśubhāt tadā vāmajānunā savyapādenākramya tāvaj japed yāvat sidhyati | tato brahmaghnasyāpi sidhyati ||

ap12.­21

tatredaṃ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇasādhane mantravidarbhaṇam | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa āgaccha · āgaccha hūṃ phaṭ | khaḍgādisiddhau tu amukaṃ me sādhayeti yojayet | pādākramaṇe tu · amukaṃ hana hana · iti yojayet ||

ap12.­22

ekavāroccāraṇena sarvāṇi pañcānantaryakṛtāny api dahati | sarvapāpaṃ me nāśayeti yojayet | evaṃ sarvabhayeṣūccāraṇamātreṇa rakṣāṃ karoti | rakṣa rakṣa mām iti yojayet | evaṃ sarvatra rakṣām āvahati ||

ap12.­23

atha prajvalantam iva lohaṃ dhyātvā sarṣapaṃ mudgaṃ māṣaṃ cāṣṭottaraśatavārān nijamantreṇāmantrya ḍākinyādigṛhītaṃ tāḍayet | sarve te 'pasaranti | tāḍanakāle ḍākinyādikam apasārayeti yojayet ||

ap12.­24

atha khaṭikāyā apakvaśarāvadvaye 'ṣṭadalapadmāntargataṃ mantraṃ kṛtvā sampuṭīkṛtya kaivartajālena veṣṭayitvā dvāre lambāpayet341 | bālānāṃ rakṣāṃ karoti | rakṣa rakṣa bālakam iti yojayet ||

ap12.­25

madanena caturaṅgulasādhyaputtalikāṃ kṛtvā taddhṛdi bhūrje mantram abhilikhya rājikādinā prakṣipet | tataḥ kaṇṭakena mukhaṃ kīlayet | prativādino mukhaṃ kīlitaṃ bhavati | devadattasya mukhaṃ kīlayeti yojyam ||

ap12.­26

catuṣpathe nikhanet | evaṃ pādau kīlayet | gatim āgatiṃ stambhayati | devadattasya pādau kīlayeti yojyam | hṛdayaṃ kīlayet | kāyaṃ stambhayati | devadattasya hṛdayaṃ kīlayeti yojyam ||

ap12.­27

mānuṣāsthikīlakena lauhena vā saṃkocakaṇṭakena vā yāny aṅgāni kīlayati tāni tasya khillitāni vyathābahulāni bhavanti | devadattasyāmukāṅgaṃ kīlayeti yojyam ||

ap12.­28

yasya gṛhadvāre nikhanet tam ucchādayati | devadattam ucchādayeti yojyam | abhi­mantritaśmaśānabhasmanā dvārapaṭalayor342 nikṣepād uccāṭayati | devadattam uccāṭayeti yojyam ||

ap12.­29

puttalikāṃ kaṇṭakaiḥ khillitāṃ kṛtvā japet | devadattaṃ mārayeti yojyam ||

ap12.­30

khaḍgādikam aṣṭottara­śatavārān nija­mantrenābhi­mantrya yuddhaṃ kuryāt | jayam āsādayati | yat kāryam uddiśya baliṃ dadyāt tat tasya sidhyati ||

ap12.­31

pāparogādivyādhiṃ mayūrapiccham aṣṭottara­śatenābhimantrya nija­mantreṇāpamārjayet | amukasyāmukarogaṃ nāśayeti yojayet | sarvavyādhiśāntir bhavati ||

ap12.­32

tathaiva daṣṭakam apamārjayed dhastatāludvayena | devadattasya viṣaṃ nāśayeti yojyam | nirviṣaṃ kurute ||

ap12.­33

evaṃ vaśībhūtam āyattaṃ svasthānam āgataṃ nagnaṃ muktakeśaṃ cāgrato dhyātvā pādapatitaṃ ca dṛṣṭvā japet | vaśo bhavati | amukaṃ ca vaśam ānayeti yojayet ||

ap12.­34

evaṃ pūrvavad ākṛṣṭaṃ dhyātvā japet | ākṛṣṭo bhavati | amukam ākarṣayeti yojyam ||

ap12.­35

ātmānaṃ dhanadhānyādi­paripūrṇaṃ dhyātvā japet | puṣṭiṃ me kurv iti yojyam ||

ap12.­36

idaṃ mantraṃ trikoṇadvaya­sampuṭa­madhye parṇapatre kaṇṭakena likhitvā pañcamarīcaiḥ saha tāmbūlaṃ bhakṣayet | sarvajvarāṇi nāśayeti yojyam ||

ap12.­37

candragrahe sūryagrahe vā kṣīrabhaktena dadhi­bhaktena vā pātraṃ pūrayitvā saśarkareṇa saghṛtena saptāśvattha­pattropari sthāpayitvā saptapatrācchāditaṃ kṛtvā hastābhyām avaṣṭabhya tāvaj japed yāvan mukto na bhavati | taṃ bhakṣayet | pañcaśatāyur bhavati ||

ap12.­38

anenaiva krameṇa haritālaṃ gorocanaṃ manaḥśilāṃ vā sādhayet, kajjalaṃ vā | jvalite tilakenāñjanena vā vidyādharaḥ | dhūmāpite 'ntardhānam | uṣmāpite vaśīkaraṇam ||

ap12.­39

athavā nāgeśvarakāṣṭhamayam anantaṃ nāgarājaṃ kārayet | taṃ jalamadhye 'dhomukhīkṛtya japed ākāśaṃ paśyan | hara hara · anantaṃ śīghraṃ varṣāpayeti yojayet | devo varṣati ||

ap12.­40

athānantaṃ jalād uddhṛtya kṣīreṇa snāpayitvā visarjayet | atha meghaṃ vyavalokayañ japet | sarvavātavṛṣṭiṃ stambhayeti yojayet ||

ap12.­41

iti sārdhadaśākṣarakalpaḥ | evaṃ dvitīyatṛtīya­mūla­mantrayoḥ kalpaḥ | hṛdaya­mantrāṇām apy ayam eva kalpaḥ ||

ap12.­42

prathamamālāmantraṃ ketakīpattre kaṇṭakena likhitvā nīlavastra­sūtrābhyām āveṣṭya jvaritasya śirasi bāhau kaṇṭhe vā pṛṣṭhe vāmapādaṃ dattvā bandhayet krodhacetasāmukasya jvaraṃ nāśayāmīti kṛtvā | sarvajvarāṇi nāśayati ||

ap12.­43

bandhanakāle rogiṇaṃ pūrvābhi­mukhī­kṛtya dagdha­matsya­bhakta­madyādi­pūrṇaśarāveṇa nirmañcayitvā,343 idaṃ bhuktvā, sarve jvarādayo 'pasarantu śīghraṃ bhagavān caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa evaṃ ājñāpayati | yadi nāpasariṣyatha tadā bhagavān kruddhas tīkṣṇena khaḍgena tilapramāṇaṃ kṛtvā chetsyati | ity uktvā nairṛtakoṇe dadyāt | tato bhadraṃ bhavati ||

ap12.­44

evaṃ sarvavyādhi­ḍākinyādyupadrave ca balir deyaḥ344 | sarvabhayeṣu paṭhitamātreṇa rakṣāṃ karoti | aparaṃ mūlamantroktaṃ sarvaṃ karoti | dvitīya­mālā­mantrasyāpy ayam eva vidhiḥ ||

ap12.­45

tṛtīyamālāmantreṇotsṛṣṭapiṇḍam abhimantrya dadyāt | varado bhavati | bhaktapiṇḍam abhimantrya vikālavelāyāṃ vivikte dadyād | yat kāryam uddiśya tat sarvaṃ sidhyati | śeṣakalpas tu pūrvavat | pūrvavad vidhinā śuklapratipadam ārabhya paurṇamāsīṃ yāvat pūrvavat kuryāt ||

ap12.­46

mālāmantrāṇāṃ daśasahasreṇa pūrvasevā bhavati | devānāṃ viśeṣamantrāṇāṃ mūlamantravat kalpaḥ | yathā bhagavato mantrakalpas tathā devīnāṃ | viśeṣas tu mālāmantrajāpāt kavitvaṃ pāṇḍityaṃ ca śīghram eva sampadyate ||

ap12.­47

tṛtīyamūlamantrasya kalpo bhavati | śayanam āruhya vāmahastena liṅgaṃ gṛhītvāṣṭaśataṃ japed yasyā nāmnā sāgacchati | kāmayet | mantraḥ oṁ vauheri amukī māyātu hūṃ phaṭ ||

ap12.­48

gairikayā bhagaṃ ālikhya bhūmau vāma­hastenāvaṣṭabhyāṣṭa­śataṃ japed yasyā nāmnā sāgacchati ||

ap12.­49

sarṣapaṃ saptābhimantritaṃ kṛtvā puruṣaṃ tāḍayet | nirvyādhir bhavati | manasā kalpayet | udakaṃ parijapya hanyāt | rudhiraṃ sravati | vastraṃ parijapyāvaguṇṭhayet | sarvajanapriyo bhavati | lavaṇaṃ parijapya yasya khāne pāne dadyāt taṃ vaśīkaroti ||

ap12.­50

govālarajjuṃ yasya gale badhnāty abhimantrya sa gaur bhavati | ādityābhimukho yasya nāmnā japet tam ākarṣayati | viḍālaromarajjuṃ yasya gale badhnāti sa viḍālo bhavati | kākasnāyurajjunā kāko bhavati | puruṣakeśarajjunā puruṣo bhavati | strīkeśarajjunā strī bhavati ||

ap12.­51

evaṃ yasya yasya keśaromādirajjuḥ kriyate tasya tasyaiva rūpaparivartanaṃ bhavati | yasya nāmnā japet tasya raktākṛṣṭiḥ | animiṣanayano yaṃ dṛṣṭvā japati sa vaśyo bhavati | iti devīmantrakalpaḥ ||

ap12.­52

balimantreṇa baliṃ dadyāt | sarvopadravavyādhi­vighnādiśāntir bhavati | yasmin kārye samutpanne balim upaharet tat tasya sidhyati | sita­puṣpa­śarāva­kṣīra­śarāva­sugandhi­jala­śarāva­bhakta­śarāva iti śarāva­catuṣṭayaṃ phalopaphalikāṃ ca praśāntāyāṃ rātrau oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa imaṃ baliṃ gṛhṇa · amukakāryaṃ me sādhaya hūṃ phaṭ ity aṣṭottara­śatenābhi­mantrya nivedayet vivikte | tasyābhimataṃ sidhyati ||

ap12.­53

atha bhagavato mūlamantreṇāṣṭottara­śatajaptena kaṭutailena gurviṇyā bhagābhyantaraṃ mrakṣayet | pibec ca | sukhena prasūyate | anenaiva vraṇamrakṣaṇāc chāntir bhavati | sarvaṃ bhakṣaṇenāpi ||

ap12.­54

prathamamālāmantraṃ bhūrje ṣoḍaśadalakamala­madhye likhet | nīlasūtreṇa veṣṭayitvā śarīre dhārayet | sarvatra rakṣā bhavati | gorocanālaktena likhet ||

ap12.­55

dvitīyasyāpy ayaṃ vidhiḥ | evam anyatantra­kalpoktam apy atraiva niyojayet | tathaiva sarvaṃ sidhyati bhāvanāsakta­yoginaḥ ||


ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇa­tantre sarva­mantra­kalpapaṭalo dvādaśamaḥ ||

ap13.

Chapter A13

ap13.­1
atha bhagavaty āha |
sthātavyaṃ yoginā kena saṃvareṇa vada prabho |
caryā ca kīdṛśī kāryā siddhiḥ kenāśu labhyate ||
ap13.­2
bhagavān āha |
māraṇīyā hi vai duṣṭā buddhaśā[sa]nadūṣakāḥ |
teṣām eva dhanaṃ gṛhya sattvebhyo hitam ācaret ||
ap13.­3
caṇḍāḥ sarvā hi vai sevyā yatinyo mātaraṃ sutīm|
bhakṣayet matsyamāṃsaṃ tu piben madyaṃ samāhitaḥ ||
ap13.­4
mithyayā svaparayor doṣaṃ cchādayed dhyānatatparaḥ |
sidhyate nirvikalpātmā guptaśikṣāprayogataḥ ||
ap13.­5
yena yenaiva pāpena sattvā gacchanty adhogatim |
tena tenaiva pāpena yogī śīghraṃ prasidhyati ||
ap13.­6
atha bhagavatī dveṣavajrī bhagavantam evam āha | kathaṃ bhagavan viparītasaṃvaraṃ bhāṣase |
atha bhagavān āha |
rāgeṇa hanyate rāgo vahnidāho 'tha vahninā |
viṣeṇāpi viṣaṃ hanyād upadeśaprayogataḥ ||
ap13.­7
niḥsvabhāvaṃ jagad dhyātvā siddho 'ham iti bhāvayan |
suguptaṃ cācaret sarvaṃ yathā ko' pi na budhyate ||
ap13.­8
sarvapāpakṣayaṃ kṛtvā viparītenaiva sidhyati |
na karoti suguptaṃ yo yogī yogaikatatparaḥ ||
ap13.­9
viparītasaṃvare345 'smin346 siddhis tasya na vidyate |
pāpaṃ nāsti na puṇyaṃ ca niḥsvabhāvasvabhāvataḥ ||
ap13.­10
lokakaukṛtyanāśārthaṃ mayā na prakaṭīkṛtam |
idānīṃ caivoktaṃ satyaṃ caṇḍarūpeṇa bho priye ||
ap13.­11
yogilokāvatārāya sarvasattvārthahetave |
prakaṭaṃ saṃvaraṃ vakṣye śṛṇu tvam adhunā priye ||
ap13.­12
na ca prāṇivadhaṃ kuryāt na parasvāpahāraṇam |
parastrīharaṇaṃ naiva347 naiva bhāṣen mṛṣā vacaḥ ||
ap13.­13
madyaṃ naiva pībed dhīmān lokakaukṛtyahānaye |
prakaṭaṃ śikṣāpadaṃ hy etat sādaraṃ ca samārabhet ||
ap13.­14
yad uktaṃ saṃvaraṃ hy etat caryedānīṃ hi kathyate |
ratnamaulaṃ śire kuryāt tāṭaṅkaṃ karṇayos tathā ||
ap13.­15
nānālaṃkārakaṃ kṛtvā dhārayed ātmadehake |
pādayor nūpuraṃ kāryaṃ mekhalāṃ ca tathā kaṭau ||
ap13.­16
savyahaste tathā khaḍgaṃ pāśaṃ vāme pradhārayet |
maulau ca mūdraṇaṃ kāryaṃ pañcabuddhaprayogataḥ ||
ap13.­17
pañcacīraṃ tu kartavyaṃ śmaśrukeśaṃ vikhaṇḍayet |
daśābdordhvavayaḥsthāṃ tu gṛhya caryāṃ samācaret ||
ap13.­18
pūrvoktakulabhedena kanyāṃ vai prakalpayet |
kanyāyogam348 alaṅkārair maṇḍayet tāṃ ca nityaśaḥ ||
ap13.­19
savye karttiṃ ca vai dadyāt vāme caiva kapālakam |
kulabhedena vai kuryād varṇabhedopatis349 tanau ||
ap13.­20
gṛhītvā svakulīṃ prajñāṃ parakulīṃ vā samāhitaḥ |
svecchayā tu samāgṛhya caryātmatāṃ samācaret ||
ap13.­21
ratnāder abhāvena350 kuryād ārthā351 dinirmitam |
athavā cetasā kuryād yady alābhaḥ pravartate ||
ap13.­22
viharet pañcasamayān352 kulapañcaprabhedataḥ |
pūrvoktenaiva yogena dvābhyāṃ dvaṃdvaṃ samārabhet ||
ap13.­23
sidhyate sarvathā yogī nātra kāryā vicāraṇā |
prajñopāyasamāyogān nakhaṃ dadyāt tu tryakṣaram ||
ap13.­24
cumbanāliṅganaṃ caiva sarvasvaṃ śukram eva ca |
dānapāramitā pūrnā bhavaty eva na saṃśayaḥ ||
ap13.­25
tatparaṃ kāyavākcittaṃ saṃvṛtaṃ gāḍhasaukhyātaḥ |
śīlapāramitā jñeyā sahanāc ca nakhakṣatam ||
ap13.­26
tryakṣaraṃ pīḍanaṃ caiva kṣāntipāramitā tv iyam |
sādaraṃ tu dīrghakālaṃ ratiṃ kuryāt samāhitaḥ ||
ap13.­27
vīryapāramitā jñeyā tatsukhe cittayojanāt |
sarvato bhāvarūpeṇa dhyānapāramitā matā ||
ap13.­28
strīrūpabhāvanā prajñāpāramitā sā prakīrtitā |
surataikayogamātreṇa pūrṇā ṣaṭpāramitā ||
ap13.­29
bhavet pañcapāramitā puṇyaṃ jñānaṃ prajñeti kathyate |
suratayogasamāyukto yogī sambhārasambhṛtaḥ ||
ap13.­30
sidhyate kṣaṇamātreṇa puṇyajñānasamanvitaḥ |
yathā latāsamudbhūtaṃ phalaṃ puṣpasamanvitam ||
ap13.­31
ekakṣaṇāc ca sambodhiḥ sambhāradvayasambhṛtā |
sa trayodaśabhūmīśo bhavaty eva na saṃśayaḥ ||
ap13.­32
bhūmis tu muditā jñeyā vimalā cārciṣmatī tathā |
prabhākarī sudurjayābhimukhī dūraṅgamācalā ||
ap13.­33
sādhumātī dharmameghā samantaprabhā tathā |
nirupamā jñānavatīty evaṃ trayodaśasaṃjñayā ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre caryāpaṭalas trayodaśamaḥ ||
ap14.

Chapter A14

ap14.­1

atha tasmin parṣadi samantabhadro nāma vajrayogī bhagavantam etad avocat | paripṛcchāmy ahaṃ nātha kim artham acalasaṃjñakam ekallavīrasaṃjñā ca caṇḍamaharoṣaṇeti ca |


atha bhagavān āha |
prajñopāyasamāyogān niścalaṃ sukharūpiṇam |
prajñopāyātmakaṃ tac ca virāgeṇa na cālitam ||
ap14.­2
tenaivācalam ākhyātaṃ vajrasattvasvarūpiṇam |
dvibhujaikamukhaṃ śāntaṃ svaccham apratighamanaḥ ||
ap14.­3
khaḍgapāśakarābhyāṃ tu prajñāliṅganatatparam |
sattvaparyaṅkam āsīnaṃ padmacandraravisthitam ||
ap14.­4
ā saṃsāraṃ ca tiṣṭhed divyasaukhyena susthitam |
tenedam acalaṃ khyātaṃ sarvabuddhais tu sevitam ||
ap14.­5
acalaṃ vai prabhāvitvā sarve traipathikā jināḥ |
sattvārthaṃ hi vai kurvanti yāvad āhṛtasamplavam ||
ap14.­6
atha samantabhadra uvāca |
akāreṇa kim ākhyātaṃ cakāreṇa kim ucyate |
lakāreṇa kim ucyate kīdṛśaṃ nāma saṃgraham ||
ap14.­7
bhagavān āha |
akāreṇākṛtrimaṃ sahajasvabhāvam ity uktam |
cakāreṇānandaparamānandaviramānanda- ||
ap14.­8
sahajānandākhyacaturānandasvabhāvam uktam |
lakāreṇa lalanālālitaṃ suratam uktam ||
ap14.­9
akāreṇocyate prajñā cakāreṇāpy upāyakaḥ |
prajñopāyaikayogena lakāraḥ sukhalakṣaṇāt ||
ap14.­10
sa evaikallavīras tu eka ekallakaḥ smṛtaḥ |
virāgamardanād vīraḥ khyāta ekallavīrakaḥ ||
ap14.­11
caṇḍas tīvrataraś cāsau sa mahāroṣaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ |
roṣaṇaḥ krodhano jñeyaḥ sarvamāravimardanaḥ ||
ap14.­12
virāgaḥ caṇḍanāmā vai mahān rāgādimāraṇāt |
roṣaṇaḥ krodhanas tatra virāge durdame ripau ||
ap14.­13
vāmagulphena cāyantrya brahmasūtraṃ samāhitaḥ |
daṃṣṭroṣṭhapuṭaḥ kruddho virāgaṃ ca vināśayet ||
ap14.­14
anayā mudrayā yogī prajñām āliṅgya nirbharam |
virāgaṃ sarvato hatvā buddhasiddhim avāpnute ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre 'calānvayapaṭalaś caturdaśamaḥ ||
ap15.

Chapter A15

ap15.­1
atha bhagavatī dveṣavajry uvāca | ekavīraḥ kathaṃ sidhyed brūhi tvaṃ parameśvara |
atha bhagavān āha |
jhaṭity ākārayogena kṛṣṇācalaṃ vibhāvayet |
tataḥ sthairyabalād eva yogī buddho na saṃśayaḥ ||
ap15.­2
śvetaṃ cācalaṃ dhyāyāt pītaṃ vā raktam eva vā |
śyāmaṃ vācalaṃ dhyāyād dveṣavajryādisampuṭam ||
ap15.­3
madhye pañcācalānāṃ vai gṛhītvaikaṃ vibhāvayet |
prajñāṃ tu tatkulīnāṃ tu anyāṃ vātha bhāvayet ||
ap15.­4
sidhyate tena yogena yogī śīghraṃ na saṃśayaḥ |
prajñayā rahitaṃ vātha bhāvayet susamāhitaḥ ||
ap15.­5
bhāvanābalaniṣpattau bodhirājyam avāpnute ||
ap15.­6
atha bhagavaty āha |
viśuddhiṃ devatāyās tu śrotum icchāmi nāyaka |
pūrvoktāmaṇḍalānāṃ tu viśuddhiṃ me vada prabho ||
ap15.­7
atha bhagavān āha |
athātaḥ saṃpravakṣyāmi viśuddhiṃ sarvaśodhanam ||
ap15.­8

tatra caturasraṃ caturbrahmavihārī | caturdvāraṃ catuḥsatyaṃ | catustoraṇaṃ caturdhyānam | aṣṭau stambhā āryāṣṭāṅgo mārgaḥ | ekapuṭaṃ cittaikāgratā | padmaṃ yoniḥ | viśvavarṇaṃ viśvanirmāṇāt | nava navāṅgapravacanāni | dikṣu raktaṃ mahārāgāt | vidikṣu pītaśyāmaśādvalakṛṣṇāni brahmavaiśyakṣatriyaśudrajātitvāt | candrasūryau śukraśoṇite | khaḍgo madhye kṛṣṇācalacihnam, kartrir viśvavajrāḥ purvādidikṣu śvetācalādīnām, āgneyādividikṣu mohavajryādīnām | iti maṇḍalaviśuddhiḥ ||


ap15.­9
bhāvanāśuddhir ucyate |

prathamaṃ pūjā puṇyasambhāro viśiṣṭaṃ karma | śūnyatā jñānasambhāro maraṇaṃ viśiṣṭam | svacchadeho 'ntarābhavadehaḥ | kūṭāgāraparyantaṃ buddhabhuvanam | padmaṃ yoniś | candrasūryau śukraśoṇite ||

ap15.­10

hūṁ kṛtir mātuḥ pitur antarābhavacittam, akṣobhyaḥ pitā māmakī mātā | anayor anyonyānurāgaṇaṃ dṛṣṭvā pitari dveṣaṃ kṛtvā mātary anurāgaṃ ca, mohena sattvacittavat saṃkramet | padmān nirgataḥ potaḥ pitṛmāraṇaṃ tatpadaprāptaye mātṛgrahaṇaṃ janmāntaravātsalyād viśiṣṭasukhāya so 'pi putrāñ janayati duhitṝṃś ceti | śvetācalādayo mohavajryādayaś ca | putrāś ca pitṛmāraṇāḥ saṃśayanaparāḥ śatrava eveti tāvan mārayet | duhitṝṃś ca kāmayet janmāntaravātsalyād viśiṣṭasukhāya ||

ap15.­11

khaḍgaḥ prajñā pāśa upāya | athavā pāśaḥ prajñā khaḍga upāyaḥ | ubhayoḥ samarasīkaraṇaṃ tarjanī | vāmādhodṛṣṭiḥ saptapātālapālanam savyordhvadṛṣṭiḥ sapta­brahmāṇḍapālanam | vāmabhūgatajānuḥ pṛthvīpālanam | savyasaṃprahārapadaṃ sarvamāratrāsanam | brahmā skandhamāraḥ | śivaḥ kleśamāraḥ | viṣṇur mṛtyumāraḥ | śakro devaputramāraḥ ||

ap15.­12

pṛthvī sakalamartyakanyā | upabhogaḥ kumāraḥ | dīrghasthitiḥ padmāsanaḥ | yonijaḥ, candrasūryāsanaḥ | śukraśoṇitajaḥ puruṣarūpaṃ bhāvaḥ, strīrūpam abhāvaḥ | nīlo vijñānaṃ, śveto rūpaṃ, pīto vedanā, raktaḥ saṃjñā, śyāmaḥ saṃskāraḥ ||

ap15.­13

athavā nīla ākāśaṃ, śveto jalaṃ, pītaḥ pṛthvī, rakto vahniḥ, śyāmo vātaḥ | yathā bhagavatāṃ tathā bhagavatīnām ||

ap15.­14

athavā nīlaḥ suviśuddhadharmadhātujñānam, śveta ādarśajñānam, pītaḥ samatājñānam, raktaḥ pratyavekṣaṇājñānam, śyāmaḥ kṛtyānuṣṭhānajñānam ||


ap15.­15
eka eva jinaḥ śāstā pañcarūpeṇa saṃsthitaḥ |
prajñāpāramitā caikā pañcarūpeṇa saṃsthitā ||
ityekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre viśuddhipaṭalaḥ pañcadaśamaḥ ||
ap16.

Chapter A16

ap16.­1
atha bhagavaty āha |
katham utpadyate lokaḥ kathaṃ yāti kṣayaṃ punaḥ |
kathaṃ vā bhavet siddhir brūhi tvaṃ parameśvara ||
ap16.­2
atha bhagavān āha |
avidyāpratyayāḥ saṃskārāḥ |
saṃskārapratyayaṃ vijñānam |
vijñānapratyayaṃ nāmarūpam |
nāmarūpapratyayaṃ ṣaḍāyatanam |
ṣaḍāyatanapratyayaḥ sparśaḥ |
sparśapratyayā vedanā |
vedanāpratyayā tṛṣṇā |
tṛṣṇāpratyayam upādānam |
upādānapratyayo bhavaḥ |
bhavapratyayā jātiḥ |
jātipratyayā jarāmaraṇaśoka­pari­deva­duḥkha­daurmanasyopāyāsāḥ | evam asya kevalasya mahato duḥkha­skandhasya samudayo bhavati ||
ap16.­3
evam apy avidyānirodhāt saṃskāranirodhaḥ |
saṃskāranirodhād vijñānanirodhaḥ |
vijñānanirodhān nāmarūpanirodhaḥ |
nāmarūpanirodhāt ṣaḍāyatananirodhaḥ |
ṣaḍāyatananirodhāt sparśanirodhaḥ |
sparśanirodhād vedanānirodhaḥ |
vedanānirodhāt tṛṣṇānirodhaḥ |
tṛṣṇānirodhād upādānanirodhaḥ |
upādānanirodhād bhavanirodhaḥ |
bhavanirodhāj jātinirodhaḥ |
jātinirodhāj jarāmaraṇaśoka­pari­deva­duḥkha­daurmanasyopāyāsā nirudhyante | evam asya kevalasya mahato duḥkha­skandhasya nirodho bhavati ||
ap16.­4
pratītyotpadyate lokaḥ pratītyaiva nirudhyate |
buddhvā rūpadvayaṃ caitad advayaṃ bhāvya sidhyati ||
ap16.­5
atha bhagavatī uvāca |
kathayatu bhagavān avidyādivivecanam |
atha bhagavān āha |
triparivartam idaṃ cakram atītādiprabhedataḥ |
dvādaśākāram ākhyātaṃ dharmaṃ sarvajinair iha ||
ap16.­6

tatrāvidyā heyopādeyājñānaṃ | maraṇānantaraṃ dhanva353 rūpaṃ cittaṃ śarīrākāraṃ bhavatīty arthaḥ ||

ap16.­7

tasmāt saṃskāro bhavati sa ca trividhaḥ | tatra kāyasaṃskāra āśvāsapraśvāsau | vāksaṃskāro vitarkavicārau | manaḥsaṃskāro rāgadveṣamohāḥ | ebhir yuktāvidyā śvasati praśvasati vitarkayati sthūlaṃ gṛhṇāti vicārayati sūkṣmaṃ gṛhṇāti | anurakto bhavati dviṣṭo mugdhaś ca ||

ap16.­8

tasmād vijñānaṃ bhavati | ṣaṭprakāraṃ cakṣurvijñānaṃ śrotra° ghrāṇa° jihvā° kāya° manovijñānaṃ ca | ebhir yuktāvidyā paśyati śṛṇoti jighrati bhakṣati spṛśati vikalpayati ||

ap16.­9

tasmān nāmarūpam | nāma catvāro vedanādayaḥ | rūpaṃ rūpam eveti | dvābhyām abhisaṃkṣipya piṇḍayitvā354 nāmarūpety uktam | upādāna355 pañca­skandha­rūpeṇāvidyā pariṇamatīty arthaḥ | tatra vedanā trividhā sukhā, duḥkhā, aduḥkhāsukhā356 ceti | saṃjñā vastūnāṃ357 svarūpa­grahaṇāntarābhilāpaḥ358 | saṃskārāḥ sāmānya­viśeṣāvasthā­grāhinaś359 cittacaittāḥ | vijñānāni360 pūrvoktāny eva | rūpaṃ caturbhūtātmakam | pṛthivī gurutvaṃ kakkhaṭatvam361 | āpo dravatvam abhiṣyanditatvam362 | teja uṣmatvaṃ paripācanatvam | vāyur ākuñcanaprasāraṇa363 laghusamudīraṇatvam ||

ap16.­10

tasmāc chaḍāyatanāni cakṣuḥ­śrotra­ghrāṇajihvākāya­manāṃsi | ebhir yutā364 pūrvavat paśyatītyādi ||


ap16.­11
tasmāt sparśaḥ |
rūpa­śabda­gandha­rasa­sparśa­dharmadhātu­samāpattiḥ365 |
tatas tṛṣṇā sukhābhilāṣaḥ |
tata upādānaṃ tatprāpakaṃ366 karma |
tato bhavo garbhapraveśaḥ |
tato jātiḥ prakaṭīkaraṇābhiniṣpattiḥ | upādāna­pañca­skandha­lābhaḥ367 ||
ap16.­12

tato jarā purātanībhāvaḥ | maraṇaṃ cittacaittanirodhaḥ | tato jarāmaraṇacintayan368 śokākulo bhavati | muktir mayā na paryeṣiteti369 paridevate | vyādhyādyupadrutaś370 ca duḥkhī bhavati | tad evaṃ371 punaḥ punar manasi yojayan372 daurmanasyī373 bhavati | durmanā api kenāpy upadruta374 upāyāsī bhavati ||

ap16.­13

ayam arthaḥ | avidyādiṣaḍāyatana­paryantenāntarābhava­sattva ekatraiva sthitas trailokyaṃ paśyan paśyati strīpuruṣān anuraktān | tato 'tītajāti­kṛtakarmaṇā prerito yaj375 jātāv utpanno bhaviṣyati tajjātistrī­puruṣau ratau dṛṣṭvātīva tasya tayoḥ sparśa utpadyate ||

ap16.­14

tatra yadi puruṣo bhaviṣyati tadātmānaṃ puruṣākāraṃ paśyati | bhāvimātari paramānurāgo bhavati | bhāvipitari ca mahāvadviṣṭaḥ | rāgadveṣau ca sukhaduḥkhe376 vedane | tataḥ kenākāreṇānayā sārdhaṃ ratiṃ karomīti cintayann aduḥkhāsukha377 vedanatayā vyāmugdho bhavati ||

ap16.­15

tataḥ pūrvakarmavātaprerito mahātṛṣṇayā etāṃ ramāmīti kṛtvā kaṣṭena ko hi puruṣo mama striyaṃ kāmayate iti378 kṛtvā tārāsaṃkramaṇavad bhāvipitṛśiromārgeṇa praviśya tasya śukrādhiṣṭhitaṃ cittam adhiṣṭhāya bhāvimātaraṃ kāmayantam ātmānaṃ paśyati sukhakāraṇam upādadāti tataḥ śukreṇa samarasībhūya mahārāgānurāgeṇāvadhūtīnāḍyā pitur vajrān nirgatya mātuḥ padmasuṣirasthavajradhātvīśvarīnāḍyā kukṣau janmanāḍyāṃ sthitaḥ | kṣaraṇāntaritavat tato bhavo bhavati ||

ap16.­16

sa ca krameṇa kalalārbudaghanapeśīśākhāyuto navabhir daśabhir vā māsair yenaiva mārgeṇa praviṣṭas tenaiva mārgeṇa nirgato | jātir bhavati ||

ap16.­17

yadi vā strī bhaviṣyati tadā bhāvipitary anurāgo bhavati | bhāvimātari ca dveṣaḥ | tata379 ātmānaṃ strīrūpaṃ paśyati | bhāvimātṛśiromārgeṇa praviśya padme patitvā śukreṇa miśrībhūya tasyā eva janmanāḍyāṃ tiṣṭhati | tataḥ pūrvavan nirgacchati jāyate ||

ap16.­18

tad evam avidyādibhir lokā jāyante | lokāś ca pañca380 skandhā eva | te ca duṣṭhu381 saṃsāriṇaḥ pañca382 skandhāḥ | na ca duḥkhena kāryam asti mokṣārthinām ||

ap16.­19

avidyādi383 nirodhāt skandhābhāvaḥ384 śūnyatā tucchatā | na ca tucchena kāryaṃ mokṣārthinaḥ ||

ap16.­20

tasmān na bhāvo mokṣo nāpy abhāvaḥ | tasmād bhāvābhāvavirahitaṃ prajñopāyasampuṭam | mahāsukharūpiṇaṃ śrīmadacalanāthātmakaṃ caturānandaikamūrticittaṃ bhavanirvāṇāpratiṣṭhitaṃ mokṣaḥ ||


ap16.­21
rāgeṇotpadyate loko rāgakṣayāt kṣayaṃ gataḥ |
acalārthaparijñānād buddhasiddhiḥ samṛdhyati ||
ap16.­22
na calati prajñāsaṅge sukharasamuditaṃ tu yac cittam |
vidhunan viramasumāraṃ tad acalasaṃjñayā ca kathitam ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre pratītyasamutpādapaṭalaḥ ṣoḍaśamaḥ ||
ap17.

Chapter A17

ap17.­1
atha bhagavaty āha |
nāthedaṃ sampuṭaṃ śukraraktaliṅgabhagastane |
pravṛddhe śakyate kartuṃ vyādhivṛddhatvanāśanāt ||
ap17.­2
strīmanovaśyatābhāvāt tadvad vyākaraṇād api |
śukrasya stambhanād raktadrāvaṇād brūhi yogakam ||
ap17.­3
atha bhagavān āha |
sādhu sādhu kṛtaṃ devi yad aham adhyeṣitas tvayā |
vakṣye nānāvidhaṃ tac ca śṛṇu lokārthasiddhaye |
śarīraṃ śodhayed ādau paścāt karma samārabhet ||
ap17.­4
śukle vastre kṛtaṃ varṇaṃ śreṣṭham ujjvalitaṃ bhavet |
triphalākvātham āgṛhya yavakṣāraṃ palāśakaṃ ||
ap17.­5
bhakṣayitvā guḍaṃ pānāt kṛmyajīrṇapraṇāśanam |
ketakyāś ca rasaṃ tailaṃ hilamocīrasasaindhavam ||
ap17.­6
pītvā liptvā ca tad raudre yūkānāśo vapurvṛtāt |
ketakyāś ca rasaṃ tailaṃ pibel lavaṇasamyuṭam ||
ap17.­7
raudre bhramaṇayogena bhavel lavaṇanāśanam |
hilamocīrasaṃ kiṃcit saindhavena ca samyuṭam ||
ap17.­8
chāyāyāṃ ca sthitiṃ kṛtvā bhavet pittasya nāśanam |
ketakyāś ca rasaṃ tailān kūcamūlaṃ ca gopayaḥ ||
ap17.­9
pānayogād bhavet tailanāśa eva na saṃśayaḥ |
rasaṃ kūṣmāṇḍamañjaryāḥ pibel lavaṇasamyuṭam ||
ap17.­10
cūrṇanāśo bhaved dhanyāśleṣmāṇaṃ madhu naśyataḥ |
ekaikaṃ dvidinaṃ kuryāt paścād auṣadham ārabhet ||
ap17.­11
tenaiva phaladaṃ tac ca niṣphalaṃ cānyathā priye |
śālmalīvalkalaṃ cūrṇet taptamaṇḍena bhakṣayet ||
ap17.­12
saptadhā mantritaṃ kṛtvā prātar vā bhojanakṣaṇe |
pratyahaṃ yāvajjīvaṃ tu śukraśoṇitavardhanam ||
ap17.­13
oṁ caṇdamahāroṣaṇa idaṃ divyāmṛtaṃ me kuru hūṁ phaṭ ||
†ṛṭitaṃ† nārikelaṃ ca navanītaṃ cāpi māhiṣaṃ|
vāsyamaṇḍena samyuktaṃ medaṃ śūkarasambhavaṃ ||
ap17.­14
liṅgaṃ karṅastanānāṃ tu bhagasyāpi vimardanaiḥ |
sarvakāyavimardaiś ca vardhante te na saṃśayaḥ ||
ap17.­15
nirnakhāṃ tarjanīṃ kṛtvā mrakṣayitvā ca tena vai |
yonimadhye tu prakṣipya sphāṇḍayed randhravardhanam ||
ap17.­16
dāḍimasya tvacaḥ kalkaiḥ pacet sarṣapatailakam |
stanaṃ vimarditaṃ vardhen muṇḍirīkvāthanaśyataḥ ||
ap17.­17
śvetasarṣapavacādyaśvagandhābṛhatīkṛtaiḥ |
kalkair saṃmardayel liṅgaṃ stanaṃ karṇaṃ ca vardhate ||
ap17.­18
hastipippalīśvetāparājitākṛtais tathā |
māhiṣyanavanītena mardanāl liṅgavardhanam ||
ap17.­19

śevālakaṭurohiṇīmāhiṣyanavanītena mardanāl liṅga­vardhanaṃ ||

ap17.­20

dhustūrarasenāśvagandhāmūlaṃ piṣṭvā mahīṣyanavanītamiśritam, dhustūra­phalakoṭare 'horātraṃ sthāpayet |

tato liṅgaṃ māhiṣyaśakṛtā dṛḍhaṃ mardayitvā |
pūrvoktena rātritrayaṃ liptvā mardayed vardhate ||
ap17.­21

indragopacūrṇe ghṛtaṃ sādhayitvā māhiṣaṃ yonyabhyantaraṃ lepayet | śithilā yonir gāḍhā bhavati ||

ap17.­22

padmabīja-utpalabījamṛṇāla-uśīramustakais tilatailaṃ pācayet | tena bhagābhyaṅgād daurgandhya­śithilya­vaiṣamyonatvādikaṃ nāśayati ||

ap17.­23

nimbatvakkvāthena bhagaṃ prakṣālayet | nimbatvacā dhūpayec ca | saukumāraṃ sugandhi subhagādiguṇopetaṃ bhavati ||

ap17.­24

haritālabhāgāḥ pañca kiṃśukakṣāra­bhāgaikaṃ yavakṣāra­bhāgaikaṃ kadalīkṣāra­bhāgaikaṃ jalena piṣṭvā, lepamātreṇa bhagakakṣa­liṅgānāṃ roma385 nāśanam ||

ap17.­25

tato halāhala­sarpapucchacūrṇa­miśritaṃ kaṭutailaṃ saptāhasthāpitaṃ, tena liṅgādikaṃ mrakṣayet | na punaḥ keśāḥ prādur bhavanti ||

ap17.­26

mahiṣaśūkarahastikarkaṭaśvedatailābhyāṃ mardanāt stanādīnāṃ vṛddhiḥ ||

ap17.­27

jātīpuṣpaṃ tilena piṣṭvā bhagam udvartayet | ucchvasitaṃ bhavati ||

ap17.­28

māhiṣanavanītavacākūṭhabālā­nāgabalābhir mardanāt stanavṛddhiḥ | taptodakakṣālanād vardhitaliṅgasadṛśaṃ bhavati ||

ap17.­29

daṇḍotpalāmūlaṃ gavyaghṛtena pibet | ṛtukāle garbhiṇī bhavati ||

ap17.­30

aśva386 gandhāmūlaṃ ghṛtena pibet | garbhiṇī bhavati ||

ap17.­31

balātibalāśitaśarkārātilaṃ mākṣikamadhuyuktaṃ pibet | garbhiṇī bhavati ||

ap17.­32

bālāmūlam udakena piṣṭvā pibet | raktapravāhaṃ nāśayati ||

ap17.­33

yavacūrṇaṃ gomūtraṃ sarjarasaṃ yaṣṭi387 madhu ghṛtenodvartanāt sarvagātraṃ bhadraṃ bhavati ||

ap17.­34

varāhakrāntāmūlam ṛtukāle karṇe bandhanād garbhiṇī bhavati ||

ap17.­35

kalambīśākaṃ bhakṣayec chukravṛddhiḥ | madhuradadhibhakṣaṇena śukravṛddhi | śukraśoṇitabhakṣaṇāc chukravṛddhiḥ | strīgūthaṃ strīmūtreṇa388 golayitvā pibec chukravṛddiḥ ||

ap17.­36

āmalakīcūrṇaṃ jalena ghṛtena madhunā vā vikāle 'valihet | cakṣuṣyaṃ tāruṇyaṃ bhavati prajñāṃ ca janayati | āmalakīcūrṇaṃ tilacūrṇaṃ ghṛtamadhunā bhakṣayet tathaiva phalam ||

ap17.­37

gorakhataṇḍulāmūlam aśvagandhātilayavān guḍena samarasīkṛtya bhakṣayet | yauvanaṃ janayati ||

ap17.­38

arjunatvakcūrṇaṃ dugdhādinā bhakṣayed | varṣaprayogena triśatāyuḥ ||

ap17.­39

āmalakīrasapalaikaṃ bākucīcūrṇakarṣaikaṃ pibet prātaḥ | jīrṇe kṣīrabhojanaṃ | māsena pañcaśatāyuḥ ||

ap17.­40

bākucīcūrṇakarṣaikaṃ takreṇa jalena kāñjikena dugdhena vā pibet | ṣaṇmāsena yauvanābhyupetaḥ ||

ap17.­41

muṇḍarīcūrṇaṃ ghṛtena bhakṣayet | trisaptāhena dviraṣṭavarṣākṛtiḥ ||

ap17.­42

sanabījacūrṇapalaikaṃ raktaśālipalaikam ekavarṇagāvīkṣīreṇa śarāvadvayena randhayet | prathamaṃ kṣīraśarāvam ekaṃ kṣayaṃ nītvā sanādikaṃ tatra dattvā pacet | tato bhakṣayet | jīrṇe dugdhena bhojayet | vātātapavarjitaḥ | saptāhatrayaṃ yāvad yathā kriyā, tathottarā kriyā | tataḥ keśādayaḥ patanti punar uttiṣṭhanti | tato valipalitarahito jīvati śatāni pañca ||

ap17.­43

raktoccaṭamūlaṃ ghṛtamadhunā biḍālapadamātraṃ bhakṣayet | tathaiva phalam ||

ap17.­44

āmalakīharītakībhṛṅgarājapippalī­marīcaloha­cūrṇāni madhuśarkarābhyām uḍumbarapramāṇaṃ guḍikāṃ kuryāt | tato gulikaikāṃ bhakṣayet | māsena triśatāyuḥ ||

ap17.­45

kumārīpalam ekaṃ ghṛtadadhiyuktaṃ bhakṣayet | saptāhena triśatāyuḥ ||

ap17.­46

yavatilāśvagandhānāgabalāmāṣān dviguṇaguḍena bhakṣayet | mahābalo bhavati ||

ap17.­47

bhadrālīguṇḍakaṃ triguṇaharītakyā evaṃ jalādinā bhakṣayet | mahābalaḥ syāt ||

ap17.­48

sarvatrātmānaṃ devatākāraṃ bhāvayet, mantreṇa cauṣadhaṃ samadhitiṣṭhet ||

ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre śukrādivṛddhipaṭalaḥ saptadaśamaḥ ||
ap18.

Chapter A18

ap18.­1

atha bhagavān āha | eraṇḍamūlaṃ kāñjikena389 piṣṭvā śiro mardayet | śiraḥśūlaṃ vināśayati ||

ap18.­2

chāgasya gor narasya vā koṣṇamūtraṃ sasaindhavaṃ karṇaṃ pūrayet | karṇaroganāśaḥ | śuṣkamarkaṭatailaṃ vā dadyāt ||

ap18.­3

katakaḥ pippalī āmalakī haridrā vacā śiśireṇa vaṭikāṃ kuryāt | tenāñjanāt sarvacakṣūroganāśaḥ | madhupippalyā vāñjayet ||

ap18.­4

karṇagūthaṃ madhunāñjayet | rātryandhanāśaḥ ||

ap18.­5

kaṭakamadhunāñjayet sarvākṣiroganāśaḥ | kāñjikena tailaṃ saindhavaṃ dūrvāmūlaṃ ca kāṃse nighṛṣya mantraṃ390 japec | cakṣuśūranāśaḥ ||

ap18.­6

ghoṣaphalaṃ ghrātvā kaṅkolamūlaṃ taṇḍulodakena pibet | nasyaṃ ca dadyāt | nāsikayā raktaṃ na sravati ||

ap18.­7

śephālikāmūlacarvaṇād galaśuṇḍīṃ vinaśyati ||

ap18.­8

guñjamūlena dantakīṭavināśaḥ ||

ap18.­9

goghṛtaṃ gavyadugdhaṃ karkaṭapadaṃ pacet | pādamrakṣaṇād dantakīṭako391 naśyati ||

ap18.­10

mūlakabījaṃ priyaṅguṃ ca raktacandanakuṣṭhaṃ piṣṭvodvartanān markaṭyādir vinaśyati ||

ap18.­11

hariṇamāṃsaśuṣkaṃ chāgakṣīreṇa pibet palam ekam | kṣayaroganāśaḥ ||

ap18.­12

māhiṣyadadhibhaktabhojanād atisāranāśaḥ | āmlabhaktāśanāt tathā ||

ap18.­13

kuṭajavalkalabhāgadvayaṃ marīcaguḍaśuṇḍīnām ekabhāgaṃ gavyatakreṇa pibet | grahaṇīnāśaḥ ||

ap18.­14

āmalakīpippalīcitrakam ārdrakaṃ purātanaguḍaṃ ghṛtaṃ madhu ca samaṃ bhakṣayet | vikālakāsaśvāsavināśanam | harītakīcūrṇaṃ madhunā tathā ||

ap18.­15

khadirīśākena yavayavāgūṃ bhakṣayet | kukṣiroganāśaḥ syāt ||

ap18.­16

ārdrakaṃ jīrakaṃ dadhinā maṇḍena vā pibet lavaṇasahitam | mūtrakṛcchravināśanam ||

ap18.­17

śarkarāyavakṣāraṃ samaṃ vā bhakṣayet | śaubhāñjanamūlakvāthaṃ vā pibet, aśmarī patati ||

ap18.­18

harītakīcitrakam ārdrakaṃ392 ca mastunā pibet, plīhanāśanam ||

ap18.­19

jīrakaṃ guḍena bhakṣayet | jvaro vāto vinaśyati ||

ap18.­20

yavakṣāraṃ dadhinā pibet | āmavātanāśaḥ ||

ap18.­21

kaṭutrayaṃ viḍaṅgasaindhavaṃ dattvā maṇḍaṃ koṣṇaṃ pibet | agnir dīpyati kṛmayo vinaśyanti ||

ap18.­22

harītakīṃ guḍena bhakṣayet | durnāmā vinaśyati | harītakīṃ śuṇṭhyā bhakṣayet | āmavātanāśaḥ ||

ap18.­23

dūrvāṃ haridrayā piṣṭvā lepāt kacchanāśaḥ | anenaiva dadrūvisphoṭakukkuradaṃṣṭrāpyātādikaṃ nāśayet ||

ap18.­24

kāsamardakamūlaṃ kāñjikena piṣṭvā, tathā guḍaṃ kaṭutailena pibet | śvāso vinaśyati ||

ap18.­25

arjunatvacaṃ ghṛtādinā bhakṣayet | hṛdayavyathānāśaḥ ||

ap18.­26

bilvaṃ dagdhvā guḍena bhakṣayet | raktātisāra393 nāśaḥ ||

ap18.­27

mātuluṅgarasaṃ guḍena pibet | śūlaṃ naśyati ||

ap18.­28

guḍaṃ śuṇṭhyā nasyaṃ dadyāt | sarvaśleṣmanāśaḥ ||

ap18.­29

ketakaṃ madhunāñjayet | sarvākṣiroganāśaḥ ||

ap18.­30

kāñjikaṃ tailaṃ saindhavaṃ dūrvāmūlaṃ ca kāṃse nighṛṣyāñjanāc cakṣuḥśūlanāśaḥ ||

ap18.­31

guḍaṃ ghṛtena bhakṣayet | vātapittaśleṣmakuṣṭhādayo vinaśyanti ||

ap18.­32

triphalācūrṇaṃ ghṛtamadhunā bhakṣayet | sarvaroganāśaḥ ||

ap18.­33

harītakīcūrṇaṃ394 ghṛtamadhunā vikāla ālihet | vātaśleṣmavināśanam ||

ap18.­34

vāsakapañcāṅgaṃ vacāṃ brahmīṃ pippalīṃ ca śuṣkacūrṇīkṛtya saindhavena madhunā ca vaṭīṃ kuryāt | tato bhakṣayet vikāle | vātaśleṣma vinaśyati | svaraṃ ca madhuraṃ bhavati ||

ap18.­35

brahmī395 vacāśuṇṭhīpippalīharītakīvāsakaṃ khadiraṃ ca madhunā guḍikāṃ kṛtvā bhakṣayet | tathaiva phalam ||

ap18.­36

yavānīśuṇṭhīharītakī396 saindhavān samān bhakṣayet | sarvājīrṇanāśaḥ ||

ap18.­37

guḍūcīrasaṃ madhunā pibet | pramehanāśo māsatrayaikena ||

ap18.­38

dugdhaṃ pippalīcūrṇaṃ ghṛtamadhubhiḥ pibet | jvarahṛdrogakāsādayo naśyanti ||

ap18.­39

lajjāluśarapuṅkhayor mūlaṃ vāsodakena pīṣṭvā397 lepayet | guḍūcīmūlaṃ bhakṣayet | nāḍīvraṇanāśanam ||

ap18.­40

śuṇṭhīṃ398 yavakṣāreṇa bhakṣayet | bubhukṣā bhavati ||

ap18.­41

jayantībījaṃ marīcena pibed dinatrayam | pāparoganāśaḥ ||

ap18.­42

triphalā nalikā kṛṣṇamṛttikā bhṛṅgarājakaḥ sahakārāmlabījaṃ lohacūrṇaṃ kāñjikaṃ | ebhir pāmanaṃ kuryāt, tato guggulena keśaṃ dhūpayitvā tena mardayet | tataḥ saptāhaṃ baddhvā sthāpayet | keśarañjanam ||

ap18.­43

mayūrapittabhṛṅgarājarasābhyāṃ gavyaghṛtaṃ paktvā nasyaṃ dadyāt | saptāhāt keśarañjanam ||

ap18.­44

punarnava399 raṇḍayoḥ kvāthaṃ kuryāt ṣoḍaśaguṇena jale bhāgaikaṃ sthāpayet | tato gālayitvā śvetaguṇḍacūrṇaṃ dadyāt | tatas tailaśarāvam ekaṃ bandhayet | anena keśābhyaṅgāt keśarañjanam ||

ap18.­45

bhūmividārītrikaṭugandhakaṃ samaṃ cūrṇīkṛtya, vartikāmadhye kṛtvā, jvala­dadho­mukha­vartikākrameṇa kaṭutailaṃ gṛhya satataṃ bindudvayasya nasyena valipalitaṃ naśyati ||

ap18.­46

etena marditarasena kuṣṭhalepāc chāntir bhavati ||

ap18.­47

sadyo navanīta­mardita­gandha­kamāṣakasahitarasatolakāśāliṃcīloṇikāpiṇḍena ghaṭayantreṇābhyantare mūṣikāpihitena vālukāsahitena vahnidānād rasabandhaḥ | bhakṣaṇāt kṣayādināśaḥ ||

ap18.­48

govatsasya prathamaviṣṭhāṃ gṛhītvā guṭikāṃ kārayet | piṇḍatagaramūlaṃ piṣṭvā veṣṭayet || ekāṃ gulikāṃ bhakṣayitvā viṣaṃ bhakṣayet | na prabhavati ||

ap18.­49

jambūbījaṃ bījapūrabījaṃ śiriṣabījaṃ ca cūrṇayitvā ajakṣīreṇa, pāyasaṃ randhayet, ghṛtena bhakṣayet | pakṣaikaṃ yāvad bubhūkṣā na bhavati ||

ap18.­50

amalakī kuṣṭham utpalaṃ māṃsī balā, eṣāṃ lepena viralāḥ keṣāḥ ghanāḥ syuḥ ||

ap18.­51

kukkuradantam antardhūmena dagdhvā dugdhaghṛtānvitaṃ kṛtvā mrakṣayet | durjātā api keśā uttiṣṭhanti ||

ap18.­52

nārikelajale puruṣendriyaṃ katipayakṣaṇaṃ sthāpayitvā surasunnaguṇḍakaṃ dadyāt | puruṣavyādhir naśyati ||

ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre vyādhivṛddhatvahānipaṭalo 'ṣṭādaśamaḥ ||
ap19.

Chapter A19

ap19.­1
atha bhagavān āha |

śvetāparajitāmūlaṃ śukreṇa vaṭikāṃ kṛtvā tilakena vaśībhavati strī ||

ap19.­2

brahmadaṇḍīvacāmadhunā liṅgam uddhṛtya striyaṃ kāmayed | vaśam ānayati ||

ap19.­3

daṇḍotpalāmūlaṃ kuṣṭhaṃ tāmbūlena dadyāt, tathā brahmadaṇḍī viḍaṅgaṃ vacā kuṣṭhaṃ nāgakeśaraṃ tāmbūlena dadyāt | vaśībhavati ||

ap19.­4

gardabhaśukraṃ kamalakeśaraṃ piṣṭvā dhvajaṃ liptvā kāmayet | vaśībhavati ||

ap19.­5

adaṃśanaśiśulolāṃ gṛhya gorocanāṃ svayambhūkusumena bhāvya tilakena, vaśīkaraṇam | bhṛṇgarājamūlam ātmaśukreṇāñjanāt tathā ||

ap19.­6

śvetakaravīralatāṃ vṛkabhāsaraktena mrakṣayet | śmaśānadhūmena dhūpayitvā striyaṃ hanyād | vaśībhavati ||

ap19.­7

mayūraśikhā kākajihvā mṛtasya nirmālyaṃśukacūrṇaṃ yasyāḥ śirasi dīyate, sā vaśībhavati | viṣṇukrāntāmūlena liṅgaṃ liptvā ramaṇāt tathā ||

ap19.­8

puṣyanakṣatreṇa dhusturasya phalaṃ saṃgrahet | āśleṣanakṣatreṇa valkalaṃ, hastena patraṃ, citrayā puṣpaṃ, mūlena mūlaṃ, samabhāgacūrṇaṃ madhunā vaṭikāṃ kuryāt | karpaṭe badhya śoṣayet | tāmbūlena dadyāt | śaṅkhacūrṇena vaśīkaraṇam ||

ap19.­9

unmattakukkuradakṣiṇayāṅgulyā mekākṣīreṇa yasyā nāma likhyate, amukī āyātv iti, sāgacchati ||

ap19.­10

nirdhūmāgnau tāpayen mayūraśikhāṃ pañcamalena khānādau dadyāt | vaśo bhavati ||

ap19.­11

aparājitāmūlaṃ puṣye utpādya karpaṭaṃ mrakṣya naratailena nṛkapāle kajjalaṃ pātayet | tailāñjanāt strīpuruṣavaśīkaroti ||

ap19.­12

daṇḍotpalāmūlaṃ pañcamalena dadyāt | vaśam ānayati ||

ap19.­13

viḍaṅgaṃ tagaraṃ kuṣṭhaṃ madirayā dadyāt | aniṣṭhāṃ nāśayati ||

ap19.­14

manaḥśilānāgakeśara­cūrṇa­priyaṅgugorocanābhir akṣim añjayet | vaśīkaraṇam ||

ap19.­15

kastūrīlajjādhusturakasahadevābhiḥ kṛtatilakaḥ trailokyaṃ vaśam ānayati ||

ap19.­16

oṁ calacitte cili cili culu culu reto muñca muñca svāhā | svaliṅgasyopari raktakaravīrakusumaṃ saṃsthāpya sahasram ekaṃ japet | nāmavidarbhitena yasyāḥ purato mantraṃ paṭhaṃs tāmraśucyāṃ viddhvā bhrāmyate sā vaśyā bhavati ||

ap19.­17

pūrvasevā daśasahasrāṇi nāmarahitaṃ kṛtvā, namaḥ caṇḍālī amukīṃ vaśīkuru svāhā | sevāyutaṃ | śmaśāna­bhasma kṛṣṇa­catur­daśyām aṣṭottara­śatābhi­mantritaṃ kṛtvā strīśirasi dadyāt | vaśā bhavati ||


ap19.­18
ajasya liṅgam ādāya kaṭyāṃ śmaśāna­sūtrakaiḥ |
karaṭakasyāthavā pucchaṃ bandhayec chukrastambhanam ||
ap19.­19
satsukhaikamanāḥ kurvan maithunaṃ dhairyayogataḥ |
niśceṣṭavat sadā bhūtvā śukrastambhanam uttamam ||
ap19.­20
mūlaṃ sitakokilākhyasya dhusturasyāthavottaraṃ |
śvetaśarapuṅkhamūlaṃ ca bandhayec chukrastambhanam ||
ap19.­21
śaṇamūlaṃ śatīmūlaṃ yadi [vā] surasunnakaṃ |
bhakṣayen maithunāt pūrvam, śukrastambhanam uttamam ||
ap19.­22
karañjaṃ korayitvā tu pāradena prapūrayet |
bandhanāc ca kaṭau sūtraiḥ śukrasya dharanōttamā ||
ap19.­23

śūkarasya tailena lākṣārañjita­śvetārka†bhūla†vartyā pradīpaṃ jvālayet | śukrastambhanam ||

ap19.­24

kusumbhatailaṃ vā pacet, tena pādatalaṃ mrakṣayet | śukrastambhanam ||

ap19.­25

sitakākajaṇghāmūlaśitapadma­keśara­madhubhir lepāc chukrastambhanam ||

ap19.­26

viṣṇukrāntāmūlaṃ padmapatreṇa veṣtayitvā kaṭau bandhayet | śukrastambhanam ||

ap19.­27

haritālarasāñjana­pārada­pippalī­saindha­vakuṣṭha­pārāvataviṣṭhāṃ ca piṣṭvāṅgorddhvavartanāc chukrastambhanam ||

ap19.­28

ūrdhvabalīvardhaśṛṅgaṃ gṛhya nighṛṣya liṅgaṃ lepayet | ūrdhvaliṅgo bhavati ||

ap19.­29

kapikacchumūlaṃ †darpiṣṭa†cchāgamūtreṇa piṣṭvā, liṅgaṃ lipya, sammardya, utpāṭayet vāratrayam | stambhaṃ bhavati | taptodakakṣālanāt śāntiḥ ||

ap19.­30

kapardakābhyantare pāradaṃ pūrayitvā mukhe sthāpayet | śukrastambhanam ||

ap19.­31

chāgamūtreṇa indravāruṇīṃ saptāhaṃ bhāvayet | tenodvartanāt stabdhaṃ bhavati liṅgam ||

ap19.­32

oṣaṇīmūlaṃ kāmācīmūlaṃ dhusturabījaṃ karpūrajalena piṣṭvā liṅgaṃ lepayitvā striyaṃ kāmayet | dravati | saindhavaṭaṅgaṇa­karpūra­ghoṣaka­cūrṇaṃ madhunā piṣṭvā liṅgalepāt tathā ||

ap19.­33

pārāvatapurīṣaṃ madhunā piṣṭvā liṅgaṃ pralipya kāmayet | kṣarati ||

ap19.­34

kāmācīmūlaṃ tāmbūlena suratakṣaṇe striyaṃ bhakṣayet | kṣarati sā ||

ap19.­35

pakvatintiḍīrasikāṃ saindhavena miśrīkṛtya svatarjanyaṅgulīṃ400 lipya tasyā bhage prakṣipya vajradhātvīśvarīnāḍīṃ cālayet yāvat sā kṣarati ||

ap19.­36

karpūraṭaṅgaṇapāradahasti­pippalī­madhubhir lepāt kṣarati strī ||

ap19.­37

rāmadūtīmūlaṃ sapattraṃ carvayitvā liṅgaṃ prakṣipya kāmayet | kṣarati ||

ap19.­38

jayantyā mūlakaṃ piṣṭvā taṇḍulodaka­miśritam, ratau yonipralepena, vandhyā nārī na saṃśayaḥ ||

ap19.­39

piṣṭvā palāśabījaṃ tu lepayet | madhusarpiṣā pānāc ca raktacitrasya vandhyā nārī na saṃśayaḥ ||

ap19.­40

śalabhapataṃgacūrṇaṃ ślathayonau dadyāt | gāḍhā bhavati ||

ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre śukrastambhādipaṭala unaviṃśatitamaḥ ||
ap20.

Chapter A20

ap20.­1
atha bhagavatī bhagavantam etad avocat |
nānāvibhedanigaditaṃ mantrayantrādikauśalam |
aparaṃ śrotum icchāmi tathā kutūhalaṃ vibho ||
ap20.­2
vāyuyogamaśeṣaṃ ca tathā kālasya lakṣaṇam |
svarūpaṃ dehayantrasya prasādaṃ kuru sampratam ||
ap20.­3
atha bhagavān āha |
sādhu sādhu kṛtaṃ devi yat tvayādhyeṣito 'tra hi |
athātaḥ sampravakṣyāmi sarvavijñānasañcayam ||
ap20.­4

oṁ jvālākarālavadane hasa hasa halāhalavajre suvajre sphara sphara sphāraya sphāraya sarvameghavātavṛṣṭiṃ stambhaya stambhaya sphoṭaya sphoṭaya yaḥ yaḥ yaḥ sarvapānīyam śoṣaya śoṣaya hūṁ phaṭ | etan mantraṃ japann ākaśaṃ krośadṛṣṭyālokayet | vātameghādīn nāśayati ||

ap20.­5

oṁ phetkāra pheṁ pheṁ ha ha hā hā pheṭ | śmaśānakrīḍana­mantraḥ ||

ap20.­6

oṁ sarvavidyādhipataye parayantra­mantranāśane sarvaḍākinīnāṃ trāsaya trāsaya bandha bandha sukhaṃ kīlaya kīlaya hūṁ phaṭ | iti nagara­kṣetra­praveśana­mantraḥ ||

ap20.­7

oṁ hili hili phuḥ phuḥ | ity anena mṛttikām abhimantrya dhūliṃ dadyāt | sarpaḥ palāyati ||

ap20.­8

mammā mammā | ity anena vyāghraḥ palāyate ||

vedu ā vedu ā | ity anena hastī palāyate ||

terli ā terli ā | ity anena gaṇḍaḥ401 palāyate ||

ap20.­9

oṁ hrīṁ baṭukanātha caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | iti vāmatarjanyā koṭayan śvānaḥ palāyate ||

ap20.­10

oṁ yamāntaka hrīḥ strīḥ hūṁ hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ trāsaya trāsaya caṇḍa pracaṇḍa hūṁ phaṭ | ity anena mahīṣaḥ palāyate ||

ap20.­11

oṁ yamamardane mardaya mardaya caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | ity anena pāparogaḥ palāyate ||

ap20.­12

oṁ krośaṇe saṃkrośaṇe bhedanāya hūṁ phaṭ | [ity] abhimantryodakaṃ dadyāt | śūlaṃ palāyate ||

ap20.­13

oṁ trāsane mohanāya hūṁ phaṭ | ity anena śikhābandhanād rakṣā ||

ap20.­14

oṁ acale saṃcale amukasya mukhaṃ kīlaya hūṁ phaṭ | madanena caturaṅgulaputtalīṃ kṛtvā bhurje haritālena likhitvā tasyā mukhe prakṣipya kīlayet | catuḥpathe nikhanet | prativādimukhaṃ kīlayati ||

ap20.­15

oṁ sarvamārabhañjane amukasya pādau kīlaya hūṁ phaṭ | pūrvavad hṛdaye prakṣipya pādau kīlayet | gatim āgatiṃ stambhayati ||

ap20.­16

oṁ vikṛtānana parabalabhañjane bhañjaya bhañjaya stambhaya stambhaya vajrapāśena amukaṃ sasainyaṃ bandha bandha hūṁ phaṭ khaḥ gaḥ ha hā hi hī pheṁ pheṁ | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | pūrvavat prakṣipya senādhipater aṣṭāṅgāni kīlayet | culhyāṃ madhye adhomukhīkṛtya nikhanet | parasainyāgamanaṃ stambhayati ||

ap20.­17

oṁ daha daha paca paca matha matha jvara jvara jvālaya jvālaya śoṣaya śoṣaya gṛhṇa gṛhṇa jvala jvala | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ svāhā | śmaśānavastre viṣarājikayāṣṭāṅgulapramāṇaṃ devadattam abhilikhya mālāmantreṇa veṣṭayitvā madanaputtalikāhṛdi prakṣipya snuhī402 kāṣṭhamadhye prakṣipet | tataḥ oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa amukaṃ jvareṇa gṛhṇāpaya hūṁ phaṭ | iti japan śmaśānāgnau tāpayet | khadirabadarāgnau vā, śatruṃ jvālayati ||

ap20.­18

oṁ jaya jaya parājaya nirjitayantre hī hī hā hā sphoṭaya sphoṭaya ucchādaya ucchādaya śīghraṃ karma kuru kuru | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | śmaśānakarpaṭe likhitvā nīlasūtreṇa veṣṭya bāhau kaṇṭhe śirasi kaṭau vā dhārayet | parayantraṃ na bhavati ||

ap20.­19

oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa grasa grasa kha kha khāhi khāhi śoṣaya śoṣaya mara mara māraya māraya amukaṃ hūṁ phaṭ | śmaśānakarpaṭe likhitvā pūrvavat puttalikāyāṃ prakṣipyāṅgulapramāṇenāsthikīlakena lohakīlakena vā kīlayitvā śmaśāne adhomukhīkṛtya nikhanet | saptāhena mārayati ||

ap20.­20

oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa amukam uccāṭaya hūṁ phaṭ | nimbasthakākavāsaṃ gṛhītvā śmaśānāgninā dahayet | tadbhasmāṣṭaśatābhimantritaṃ gṛhapaṭale ca prakṣipet | uṣṭrāruḍhaṃ cārena pāśena baddhvā dakṣiṇaṃ diśaṃ nīyamānaṃ dhyāyāt | uccāṭayati ||

ap20.­21

oṁ dveṣaṇe dveṣavajre amukaṃ amukena vidveṣaya | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | yudhyamānakukkurayor dhūliṃ gṛhītvā sādhyapratikṛtidvayaṃ hanyāt | anyonyaṃ vidveṣayati ||

ap20.­22

oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hrīṁ hrīṁ hroṁ ghorarūpe caṭa pracaṭa pracaṭa hana hana ghāṭaya ghāṭaya haha haha prasphura prasphura prasphāraya prasphāraya kīlaya kīlaya jambhaya jambhaya stambhaya stambhaya amukaṃ hūṁ phaṭ | bhūrje kūrmaṃ samālikhya tālakena ṣaḍaṅgulaṃ catuṣpādeṣu hṛīkāraṃ plīkāraṃ mukhamadhyataḥ | garte viṣṭhāṃ tato likhya sādhakaṃ tu pṛṣṭhataḥ param | mālāmantreṇa saṃveṣṭya pūjāstutyā samārabhet | iṣṭakopari saṃnyasya kūrmacaṭunā cchādayet | raktasūtreṇa saṃveṣṭya pāda†prāñcata† nikṣipet | tāḍayed vāmapādenāmukaṃ me vaśam ānaya saptavārān | śatruṃ sukhaṃ stambhayati ||

ap20.­23

oṁ cili mili lalite hūṁ phaṭ | cakṣuḥsaṃkocanaṃ naśyati ||

ap20.­24

oṁ cchrīṁ cchrīṁ cchrīṁ śoṣaya śoṣaya dhāraṃ bandha bandha | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | gavāsthikīlaṃ saptāṅgulapramāṇam aṣṭottaraśatābhimantritaṃ goṣṭhe nikhanet | kṣīraṃ na sravate ||

ap20.­25

oṁ vajriṇi vajraṃ pātaya surapatir ājñāpayati | jvālaya jvālaya oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ | vālmīkamṛṇmayaṃ vajraṃ aṣṭottaraśatābhimantritaṃ paṇyāgāre gopayet | paṇyaṃ naśyati ||

ap20.­26

oṁ hrīṁ klīṁ traṁ yūṁ yamamathane ākaḍḍa ākaḍḍa kṣobhaya kṣobhaya sarvakāmaprasādhane hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā | bhurjapattre likhed devaṃ dvibhujaṃ kuṅkumasaṃnibhaṃ pāśāṅkuśahastaṃ kāmotkaṭabhīṣaṇam | gajamadamadya403 laktaraktarajasvalākuṅkumair vidarbhayet mantrākṣarāṇi | oṁ śirasi hrīṁ hṛdi klīṁ nābhau traṁ meḍhre | tato mālāmantreṇāveṣṭya raktasūtreṇa saṃvṛtya strīpuruṣakapālasampuṭe prakṣipya ghṛtamadhupūrite madanena ca veṣṭayitvā raktasūtreṇa ca śiraḥsthāne nikhanet | vāmapādenākramya japet | pañcaviṃśatisahasreṇa purakṣobhā bhavati ||

ap20.­27

oṁ ākarṣa ākarṣa mohaya mohaya amukīṃ me vaśīkuru svāhā | udarakīṭaṃ sucūrṇaṃ kṛtvā śukrānāmikāraktābhyāṃ vaṭīṃ kṛtvābhimantrya khāne pāne dadyāt | vaśīkaroti ||


ap20.­28
udbhrāntapattrau bhramarasya pakṣau
dvau rājadantau mṛtakasya mālyam |
anena cūrṇenāva404 cūrṇitāṅgī405
pade pade dhāvati mūrchitāṅgī ||
ap20.­29

oṁ śvetagṛdhṛṇi406 khāhi viṣaṃ ca ruṣaṃ ca407 khaḥ khaḥ ha ha saḥ saḥ | oṁ caṇḍamahāsenājñāpayati svāhā | athavā | oṁ saṃkāriṇi dhraṁ hāṁ hūṁ haṁ haḥ | sarvaviṣaṃ nāśayati ||

ap20.­30

oṁ nāgāri vāmanaharaḥ phaṭ | abhimantritamṛdā dvāre cīrikayā vā sarpāpraveśaḥ ||

ap20.­31

oṁ āṇe kāṇe amukiṃ vaśīkuru svāhā | sugandhiśvetapuṣpadānād vaśīkaraṇam ||

ap20.­32

namo vītarāgāya maitreyasiṃhalocani svāhā | udakenābhimantritena cakṣuḥkṣālanāt timiraṃ hanti ||

ap20.­33

oṁ saphara khaḥ | cūrṇaṃ khāda | nānuprabhavati ||

ap20.­34

ādityasya rathavegena vāsudevabalena ca garuḍapakṣapātena bhūmyāṃ gacchatu viṣaṃ svāhā | sarpavṛścikakarkaṭādiviṣaṃ nāśayati ||

ap20.­35

oṁ cāmuṇḍe 'jite 'parājite rakṣa rakṣa svāhā | saptābhimantritaṃ neṣṭukaṃ caturdiśi kṣipet | ekaṃ svasthāne sthāpayet | oṁ jambhanī stambhanī mohanī sarvaduṣṭapraśamanī svāhā | caurī na bhavati408 ||

ap20.­36

namaś caṇḍamahākrodhāya hulu hulu culu culu tiṣṭha tiṣṭha bandha bandha moha moha hana hana mṛte hūṁ phaṭ | puṣpādikaṃ parijapya dānād vaśam ānayati ||

ap20.­37

namo ratnatrayāya oṁ ṭaḥ suvismare svāhā | ketakīpattracīrikayā sarvajvarāṇi nāśayati ||

ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre nānābhibhedanigati409 yantramantrapaṭalo viṃśatitamaḥ ||
ap21.

Chapter A21

ap21.­1

atha bhagavān āha | oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa sarvamāyādarśaka sarvamāyāṃ nidarśaya nirvighne hūṁ phaṭ | anena caṇḍamahāroṣaṇaṃ dhyātvā sarvaṃ kuryāt410 ||

ap21.­2

uḍumbarakṣīreṇa karpaṭaṃ mrakṣayitvā nīrandhraṃ, satailasarjarasaṃ piṣṭvā, tasmin prakṣipya, vartiṃ kārayet | udakena dīpajvālanāj jvalati sthiram ||

ap21.­3

rātrau varaṭaprastharakhaṇḍadvayaṃ nighṛṣya hūṁkāreṇa vidyucchaṭāṃ darśayati ||

ap21.­4

mṛtajalukacūrṇasahitalākṣārañjitavartijvālanāt striyas tad dṛṣṭvā nagnā bhavanti ||

ap21.­5

ghṛtena karṇacakṣurmrakṣaṇād ātmarakṣā ||

ap21.­6

halāhalasarpasya lāṅgulaṃ chedayet | nagno muktaśikhaḥ yāval luṭati tāvan nartayet | taccūrṇamāṣaka­catuṣṭayaṃ dhūstūra­pañcāṅgaṃ pratyekaṃ māṣakaikam ebhiḥ sahitalākṣārañjita­vastravartyo dīpajvālanāt sarve nṛtyanti taṃ dṛṣṭvā | pūrvavad ātmarakṣā ||

ap21.­7

śākhoṭakamūlaṃ baheḍīmūlam ekīkṛtya gṛhe sthāpayet | kalahaṃ bhavet ||

ap21.­8

dhūstūrapuṣpamadhyasthaguṇḍakaṃ sugandhi­puṣpa­madhye prakṣipyāghrātamātreṇa śiraḥśūlaṃ bhavati | kāñjikanasyena mokṣaḥ ||

ap21.­9

kukkurīgarbhaśayyā tayā dhūpitaṃ veṣṭitaṃ mayūrapicchaṃ savyena bhrāmitena citraṃ harati | avasavyena mokṣaḥ ||

ap21.­10

kākahṛdayarudhireṇāmrapattre tatpakṣalekhanyā likhitvā mantraṃ yasya viṣṭhāyāṃ prakṣipet, sa kākena khādyate | oṁ kākakuhanī kruddhanī devadattaṃ kākena bhakṣāpaya svāhā ||

ap21.­11

bhagākāraṃ gartaṃ kṛtvā strīviṣṭhāṃ vṛścikapātrikāsutāṃ prakṣipya gopayet | tasyāḥ mārgaṃ vyathate ||

ap21.­12

snuhīkṣīrabhāvitatilatailamrakṣaṇāt śiroruhāḥ śvetā bhavanti | muṇḍite mokṣaḥ ||

ap21.­13

virālīgarbhaśayyā nārīgarbhaśayyā dvābhyāṃ dhūpād bhittau citraṃ na dṛśyate | mākṣikadhūpena mokṣaḥ ||

ap21.­14

uṣṭrakapolaśvedaphenamūtre haritālaṃ bahudhā bhāvayitvā hastaṃ mrakṣyākarṣayet | citraṃ na dṛśyate | hastakṣālanān mokṣaḥ ||

ap21.­15

strīgarbhaśayyayā dhūpāc citraṃ prarodati | gugguladhūpena mokṣaḥ ||

ap21.­16

bhekatailena cakṣurañjanād gṛhavaṃśāḥ sarpāḥ dṛśyante ||

ap21.­17

dīpanirvāṇāgnau gandhakacūrṇadānāt punar jvalati ||

ap21.­18

muṇḍirīsevālajalaukabhekavasābhiḥ pādau mṛakṣayitvā kadalīpattreṇa veṣṭya jvaladaṅgāre bhramati na dahyate ||

ap21.­19

snuhīmūlaṃ guḍena bhakṣayet | nidrā bhavati ||

ap21.­20

kāmācīmūlaṃ śikhāyāṃ bandhayet | nidrā bhavati ||

ap21.­21

nāgadamanamūlaṃ droṇapuṣpakamūlaṃ haridrātaṇḍulaṃ ca piṣṭvodvartanād udakaparīkṣāyāṃ jayaḥ ||

ap21.­22

śālmalīmūle hiṅgugulikākhananāt puṣpapātanam ||

ap21.­23

kāṅguṣṭhaṃ madirayā dadyāt tāmbulena vā | virecanaṃ bhavati ||

ap21.­24

snuhīkṣīram arkabījaṃ ghuṇacūrṇaṃ guḍena bhakṣayet | raktaṃ patati ||

ap21.­25

chucchundarīcūrṇena ghoṭakasya nāsāṃ mrakṣayet | āhāraṃ na karoti | candanena prakṣālananasyābhyāṃ mokṣaḥ ||

ap21.­26

ketakīmūlaṃ śirasi bandhayet | kharjuramūlaṃ haste, tālamūlaṃ mukhe | puṣyanakṣatreṇotpāṭayed uttaradiśisthaṃ | nagno muktaśikho bhūtvā trayāṇāṃ ca kiṃcit piṣṭvā pibet | śastrāghātaṃ na bhavati ||

ap21.­27

śyonākabījapūrṇapādukādvayaṃ hariṇacarmaṇā kuryāt | jale na majjati ||

ap21.­28

oṣaṇīṃ carvayitvā jihvātale sthāpayet | taptaphālacāṭanān na dahati ||

ap21.­29

sūtakakṣārayutahastiśuṇḍīpānād garbhapatanam ||

ap21.­30

śvetaśarapuṇkhamūlaṃ puṣye uddhṛtya gavyaghṛtena bhāvya śirasādau bandhayet | kāṇḍapatanam caurabhayaṃ vārayati ||

ap21.­31

gṛdhravasā ulūkavasābhyāṃ carmapādukām āruhya, atidūre gamanāgamane bhavataḥ ||

ap21.­32

sarṣapaphalam aśastrahataṃ sudivase saṃdhyāyām adhivāsya nagno muktaśikho bhūtvā vāmapāṇinā gṛhṇīyād bhūmau na sthāpayet | rakṣā ca bhagavato mālāmantreṇa kāryā ||

ap21.­33

yasya yasya raktena bhāvayed bahuśas tadraktasiñcanaṃ tanmāṃsenotthānakaṃ tadasthisāreṇa tailakaṃ tadbhasmanā vardhitam uptaṃ tatkapālake tadvasāsṛṅmāṃsādiraktena secanaṃ taddhūpaneyanādīn yatnena kṛtvā punaḥ punaḥ rakṣā baliś ca kāryaḥ ||

ap21.­34

pariṇataphalaṃ mukhe kṣiptvā tadātmakaṃ bhāvayet | tādṛśo bhavati ||

ap21.­35
trilohaveṣṭitenāntardhānam | tatredaṃ triloham |411
sārdhasaptatrayo māṣāḥ sārdhadvayacatuṣṭayam |
pañcaguñjās trayo māṣā ravicandrahutāśanaiḥ ||
tāmra mā 3 tī 7, rūpya mā 4 tī 2, suvarṇa mā 3 tī 5 ||412
ap21.­36

nṛkapāle gorocanāraktābhyāṃ sādhyākṛtim ālikhya tatraiva tannāma mantravidarbhitaṃ413 gandhodakaliptaṃ dvitīyakapālena sampuṭīkṛtya mṛtakasūtreṇāveṣṭya sikthakena granthya japet | cityāṅgāre tāpayet rātrau yāvat sikthako vinīyate | surakanyām apy ānayati | oṁ ākaṭa ākaṭa mohaya mohaya amukīm ākarṣaya jaḥ svāhā ||

ap21.­37

kapitthaphalaṃ cūrṇīkṛtya māhiṣyadadhnā bhāvayet saptavārān | nūtanabhāṇḍasthe takre taṃ guṇḍakaṃ kiṃcit prakṣipet | kṣaṇamātreṇa dadhi bhavati ||

ap21.­38

kapitthaphalaṃ piṣṭvā nūtanabhāṇḍaṃ lepayet | tatra dugdhaṃ yāvayet | manthurahitaṃ dadhi bhavati ||

ap21.­39

apakvaghaṭe dugdham āvartitaṃ yāvayet | jāte dadhau dhairyaśo414 ghaṭaṃ bhañjayet | dadhi ghaṭo bhavati ||

ap21.­40

arkakṣīreṇa navaghaṭaṃ vibhāvya bahudhā tatra kṣiptaṃ jalaṃ takram iva dṛśyate ||

ap21.­41

strīprathamaprasūtadaśadine bhasma gṛhītvā muṣṭidvayenādhordhvavinyāsena jale praviśet | tata urdhvarekhayā udakakumbhaḥ śuṣyati | adhobhasmarekhayā pūrayati ||

ap21.­42

ravidine sāniñcāmūlam apāmārgamūlam utpādya pṛthagmrakṣita­daṇḍāgrau kaṭidhāritau yudhyaḥ ||

ap21.­43

vaṅga-ārabīja-bālā-mrakṣitaghanakarpaṭe jalaprakṣepān na patati | tenaiva liptavetrapaṭikārohaṇāj jale na majjati ||

ap21.­44

bhūmilatākhadyotayoś cūrṇaṃ tailavimarditaṃ kṛtvā tena yal lipyate tad rātrau jvalati ||

ap21.­45

tāmrabhājane lavaṇenāmalakīṃ paṅkayitvā lohabhājanaṃ415 yena tāmram iva dṛśyate ||

ap21.­46

tapte gohaḍḍe manaḥśilācūrṇadānāj jvalati śikhā ||

ap21.­47

ṛṇṭakabījopari laghupuṣpādiṃ saṃsthāpya jaladānāt patati ||

ap21.­48

kuṇṭīrākṛtacaṭakakoṭane bhramaraṃ prakṣipyākāśe tyajeta416 | bhramati ||

ap21.­49

śuṣkamatsyo bhallātakatailenāvibhāvite jalasthaś calati ||

ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre kutūhalapaṭala ekaviṃśatiḥ ||
ap22.

Chapter A22

ap22.­1
atha bhagavān āha |
hṛdi prāṇo gude 'pānaḥ samāno nābhideśake |
udānaḥ kaṇṭhadeśe tu vyānaḥ sarvaśarīragaḥ ||
ap22.­2
eṣāṃ madhye pradhāno 'yaṃ prāṇavāyur hṛdi sthitaḥ |
śvāsapraśvāsabhedena jīvanaṃ sarvajantunām ||
ap22.­3
ṣoḍaśasaṃkrāntiyogena pratyekena daṇḍam ekam |
caturmaṇḍalavāhena dvyāyutaṃ śataṣoḍaśam ||
ap22.­4
dakṣiṇasparśavāhena vahnimaṇḍalam ucyate |
vāmasparśavāhe vāyumaṇḍalam ucyate ||
ap22.­5
vāmadakṣiṇasamasparśād bhaven māhendramaṇḍalam |
idam eva †succa†mandaṃ ca vāruṇaṃ maṇḍalaṃ bhavet ||
ap22.­6
lalanā vāmanāḍī syād rasanā savye vyavasthitā |
avadhūtī madhyadeśe hi sahajānandakṣaṇe vahet ||
ap22.­7
praveśād vaibhave sṛṣṭiḥ sthitiniścalarūpataḥ |
vināśo niḥsṛte vāyau yāvajjīvaṃ pravartate ||
ap22.­8
praviśan kumbhako jñeyaḥ pūrakas tasya dhāraṇāt |
nirgamadrecako jñeyo niścalaḥ417 stambhako mataḥ ||
ap22.­9
caṇḍaroṣaṃ samādhāya saprajñaṃ kṛta ārabhet |
praviśantaṃ gaṇayed vāyuṃ śatasahasrādisaṅkhyayā ||
ap22.­10
sidhyate tatkṣaṇād eva buddhanāthavaco yathā |
vāyum ekaṃ gaṇed yas tu prajñām āliṅgya nirbharaṃ ||
ap22.­11
sidhyate pakṣamātreṇa caṇḍaroṣaṇamurtitaḥ |
divyajñānasamāyuktaḥ pañcābhijño hi jāyate ||
ap22.­12
caṇḍaroṣasamādhisthaḥ svastrīm āliṅgya nirbharaṃ |
hṛdayena ca hṛdaṃ gṛhya guhyaṃ guhyena sampuṭam ||
ap22.­13
mukhena ca mukhaṃ kṛtvā niśceṣṭaḥ sukhatatparaḥ |
hṛdayāntargataṃ candraṃ sasūryaṃ tu prabhāvayet ||
ap22.­14
tatsthairyabalenaiva sarvajñānī bhaven naraḥ ||
ap22.­15
śamatvāharamātreṇa bhūtaṃ bhaviṣyaṃ ca vartamānaṃ |
paracittaṃ ca jānāti satyam etad vadāmy aham ||
ap22.­16
tathā tenaiva yogena karṇamadhye vibhāvayet |
śṛṇute sarvadeśasthaṃ śabdaṃ saṃnihitaṃ yathā ||
ap22.­17
tathā netre prabhāvitvā trailokyaṃ ca prapaśyati |
nāsāyāṃ ca tathā dhyātvā jānīte sarvagandhakam ||
ap22.­18
jihvārthaṃ ca tathā dhyātvā dūraṃ svādaṃ pravidyate |
svaliṅgāgre tathā dhyātvā jānīte sarvasparśakam ||
ap22.­19
śiromadhye tathā dhyātvā sarvasāmarthyavardhanam ||
ap22.­20
yatra tatra cittaṃ vāyunā samarasīkṛtaṃ |
niruddham tatra tatraiva tad eva pratibimbate ||
ap22.­21
śāntikaṃ pauṣṭikaṃ vaśyam ākṛṣṭiṃ māraṇam tathā |
uccāṭanaṃ ca sarvaṃ vai bhāvanayaiva prasidhyati ||
ap22.­22
kumbhakādiprayogena caturdṛṣṭiṃ niyojayet |
vāmāvalokinīdṛṣṭiḥ kumbhakena418 vaśīkaret ||
ap22.­23
dakṣiṇākarṣaṇī jñeyā pūrakena niyojitā |
lalāṭasthā tu yā dṛṣṭir māraṇī recakena sā ||
ap22.­24
nāsy419 āgrasthitā dṛṣṭir uccāṭanī420 stambhakena hi |
kumbhako hi parāpuṣpe snuhīvṛkṣe ca pūrakaḥ ||
ap22.­25
recakaḥ sarase vṛkṣe stambhakaḥ sacale tṛṇe |
cintitavyo hi ṣaṇmāsaṃ pūrvadṛṣṭiniyojitaḥ ||
ap22.­26
sarvasāmarthyayuktas tu sidhyate cittarodhataḥ |
cittasya rodhanād vāyo rodho vāyoś ca rodhanād ||
ap22.­27
cittasyāpi bhaved rodho anyonyagaticeṣṭitaḥ |
prajñopāyaikayoge tu vajrapadmasamāgame421 ||
ap22.­28
niruddho hi sukhaṃ bhuñjan sidhyate śocanaprabhuḥ |
vajrasattvādayo buddhāḥ sahāyās tasya mantriṇaḥ ||
ap22.­29
kiṃ punar laukikā devāḥ kīrtitāḥ śaṅkarādayaḥ |
suguptaḥ sarvatantreṣu mayā tattvācalaḥ prabhuḥ ||
ap22.­30
yasmai vārādhanaṃ kṛtvāgatā buddhā nabhopamāḥ |
gaṅgāvālukātulyā bhaviṣyanti maharddhayaḥ ||
ap22.­31
vartamānāpi vai buddhā buddhajñānasamanvitāḥ |
tasmād yogī sadā nityaṃ cintayed acalaṃ prabhum ||
ap22.­32
acalaṃ hi yo na jānāti tasya janmeha niṣphalam |
na hi tena vinā siddhiḥ kṣudramātrāpi labhyate ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre vāyuyogapaṭalo dvāviṃśatitamaḥ ||
ap23.

Chapter A23

ap23.­1

atha bhagavān āha |

pādatālukāṃ vidhvā nābhivedhāt trirātreṇa mṛtyuḥ syāt | pādatālukāṃ vidhvā cakṣurvedhān māsatrayeṇa | pādatālukāṃ vidhvā nāsikāvedhena māsatrayeṇa ||

ap23.­2

kuṭiprāvakāle samaṃ hañchikayā422 varṣeṇa | nāpitagartivedhāt pañcavarṣeṇa | jihvāgrādarśane trivāsaraiḥ | karṇāgravedhāc caturmāsaiḥ | ūrṇāvedhād dinaikena | suratasya madhye 'nte vā hañchikayā māsena | samaṃ sarvakaniṣṭḥāvedhān māsena ||

ap23.­3

samaṃ hṛtkaṇṭhavedhāt pakṣatrayeṇa | samaṃ tālukātrayavedhāt tridinaiḥ | surate karṇayor ghaṇṭānādāt trimāsaiḥ | karṇamūlabhrūmadhyamastakāgreṣu pṛthak pṛthag vedhād dinaike | pādāṅguṣṭham ārabhya nābhiparyantavedhāc chaṇmāsena ||

ap23.­4

nāsāgramāṃsāśaithilyāt saptarātreṇa | kapolamāṃsacchedāt pañcamāsaiḥ | cakṣuḥsyandanādarśanāt pañcamāsaiḥ | nāsikāvakrāt saptadinaiḥ | hṛdayanimnāt pakṣena | jihvāmadhye kṛṣṭarekhayā dvirātreṇa | nakhe raktatādarśanāc chaṇmāsaiḥ | dantaśoṣāc chaṇmāsena ||

ap23.­5

arundhatyadarśanāc chaṇmāsena | śītādau kāle viparyayāt sarvatracchidradarśanāt pakṣeṇa | haḥkārasya śītāt phuḥkārasyoṣṇād daśāhena | anāmikāmūle kṛṣṭarekhādarśanenāṣṭādaśadinena | dehāpamārjana423 śabdāśruteḥ sarvāṅgaśītāc ca daśāhena | snātamātrasya hṛtpādaśoṣāt dvimāsena | gātradurgandhāt trirātreṇa ||

ap23.­6

gātrastabdhād dinaikena | vāmavartamūtrāc chaṇmāsena | nābher viparyayāt pañcāhena | nāsāgrādarśanāt424 pañcamāsena | netrāṅgulīpīḍane jyotiradarśanāc chatadinaiḥ | karṇadhvanyaśruteḥ varṣeṇa | paracakṣuṣi pratibimbādarśanāt pakṣeṇa ||

ap23.­7

evaṃ jñātvā tadvañcanaṃ paralokaṃ ca cintayet ||

ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre mṛtyulakṣaṇapaṭalas trayoviṃśatitamaḥ ||
ap24.

Chapter A24

ap24.­1
atha bhagavān āha |
mātṛpitṛsamāyogāt pañcabhūtātmakaḥ śaśī |
pañcabhūtātmakaḥ sūryo dvayor mīlanayogataḥ ||
ap24.­2
jāyate tatra vai sattvaḥ prajñopāyātmakaḥ punaḥ |
asthibandhā bhavec candrāt sūryān māṃsādisaṃbhavaḥ ||
ap24.­3
ātmaśūnyo bhaved dehaḥ sattvānāṃ karmanirmitaḥ |
māyopamasvarūpo 'yaṃ gandharvanagaropamaḥ ||
ap24.­4
śakracāpasamaś cāyaṃ jalacandropamo mataḥ ||
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre dehasvarūpapaṭalaś caturviṃśatitamaḥ ||
ap25.

Chapter A25

ap25.­1
atha bhagavatī āha |
aparaṃ śrotum icchāmi prajñāpāramitodayam |
prasādaṃ kuru me nātha, saṃkṣiptaṃ nātivistaram ||
ap25.­2
atha bhagavān āha |
athātaḥ sampravakṣyāmi prajñāpāramitodayam |
sattvaparyaṅkinīṃ devīṃ ṣoḍaśābdavapuṣmatīm ||
ap25.­3
nīlavarṇāṃ mahābhāgāṃ akṣobhyeṇa ca mudritām |
raktapadmodyatāṃ savye līlayā vāmahastake ||
ap25.­4
sthitaṃ vai kāmaśāstraṃ tu padmacandroparisthitām |
pīnonnatakucāṃ dṛptāṃ viśālākṣīṃ priyaṃvadām ||
ap25.­5
sahajāca[la]samādhistho devīm etām tu bhāvayet |
hūṁkārajñānasambhūtāṃ viśvavajrīṃ tu yoginīm ||
ap25.­6
bhāvayet kroḍato yogī dhruvaṃ siddhim avāpnute |
athavā bhāvayec chvetāṃ vāṇīṃ dhīḥkārasambhavām ||
ap25.­7
mudritāṃ śāśvatenaiva pītāṃ vajradhātvīśvarīm |
ratneśamudritāṃ vaṁjāṃ raktāṃ vā kurukullikām ||
ap25.­8
amitābhamudritāṃ devīṃ hrīṁkārajñānasambhavām |
tārāṃ vā śyāmavarṇāṃ ca tāṁkārajñānasambhavām ||
ap25.­9
amoghamudritāṃ dhyāyāt pūrvarūpeṇa mānavaḥ |
sattvaparyaṅkasaṃsthas tu saumyarūpeṇa saṃsthitaḥ ||
ap25.­10
khaḍgapāśadharaḥ śrīmān āliṅgābhinayaḥ kṛtī |
svakulīṃ parakulīṃ vā425 kanyāṃ gṛhya prabhāvayet ||
ap25.­11
anena sidhyate yogī mudrayā naiva saṃśāyaḥ |
athavā pratikṛtīṃ kṛtvā sādhayen mṛtsnādisaṃskṛtām ||
ap25.­12
sahajacaṇḍasamādhistho japed ekāgramānasaḥ ||
ap25.­13

tatrāyaṃ japyamantraḥ | oṁ vivajri āgaccha āgaccha hūṁ svāhā | oṁ vajrasarasvatī āgaccha āgaccha dhīḥ svāhā | oṁ vajradhātvīśvarī āgaccha āgaccha vaṁ svāhā | oṁ kurukulle āgaccha āgaccha hrīṁ svāhā | oṁ tāre āgaccha āgaccha tāṁ svāhā ||


ap25.­14
athātaḥ sampravakṣyāmi ekavīraṃ tu maṇḍalam |
caturasraṃ caturdvāraṃ catustoraṇamaṇḍitam ||
ap25.­15
pītavarṇaṃ tu kartavyaṃ madhye padmaṃ caturdalam |
tasya cāgnau dalaṃ śvetaṃ nairṛte raktasaṃnibham ||
ap25.­16
vāyavye pītavarṇaṃ tu śyāmam aiśānakoṇake |
madhye vai kṛṣṇavarṇaṃ tu tatrācalaṃ prakalpayet ||
ap25.­17
sūryasthaṃ vāthavā śvetaṃ pītaṃ vā raktam eva vā |
śyāmaṃ vā pañcabhir buddhair ekarūpaṃ vicintayet ||
ap25.­18
locanām agnikoṇe ca candrāśokavidhāriṇīm |
vāmadakṣiṇakarābhyāṃ śaraccandrakaraprabhām ||
ap25.­19
nairṛte pāṇḍarādevīṃ dhanurbāṇadharāṃ parām |
raktāṃ vāyavyakoṇe tu māmakīṃ pītasaṃnibhām ||
ap25.­20
ghaṭadhānyaśikhāhastāṃ śyāmām aiśānakoṇake |
tāriṇīṃ varadāṃ savye vāme nīlotpaladhāriṇīm ||
ap25.­21
etāś candrāsanāḥ sarvā ardhaparyaṅkasaṃsthitāḥ |
rāgavajrīṃ nyaset pūrvadvāre śakrakṛtāsanām ||
ap25.­22
khaḍgakarparadharāṃ raktāṃ dveṣavajrāṃ tu dakṣiṇe |
kartritarjanīkarāṃ nīlāṃ426 yamena kṛtaviṣṭarām ||
ap25.­23
paścime mānavajrāṃ tu parśuvajradharākulīm |
mayūrapicchavastrāṃ tu varuṇasthāṃ nyaset ||
ap25.­24
sūryāsanās tv amī pratyālīḍhapadāḥ sarvāḥ427 kruddhā muktamūrdhajāḥ ||
ap25.­25
catvāro hi ghaṭāḥ koṇe kartavyāḥ pītasaṃnibhāḥ |
asya bhāvanamātreṇa yoginyaṣṭasamanvitaḥ ||
ap25.­26
trailokyasthitaḥ strīṇāṃ sa bhartā parameśvaraḥ ||
ap25.­27
athānyāṃ sampravakṣyāmi caṇḍamahāroṣaṇabhāvanāṃ |
viśvapadmodare devaṃ kalpayec caṇḍaroṣaṇam |
rāmadevaṃ428 bhave 'gnau raktavarṇaṃ tu nairṛte ||
ap25.­28
pītaṃ vai kāmadevaṃ tu śyāmaṃ māhillanāmakam |
vāyavye kṛṣṇavarṇakokilāsurasaṃjñakam ||
ap25.­29
kartrikarparakarāś caite saṃsthitālīḍhapādataḥ |
bhagavataḥ paścime devī sthitā vai parṇaśāvarī ||
ap25.­30
asyaiva dhyānayogena dagdhamatsādipūjayā bandhayet sarvadevān ||
ap25.­31
pītayā prajñayā yuktaṃ vāme429 ca śvetapadmayā |
nīlaṃ vai caṇḍaroṣaṃ tu raktayā kṛṣṇayāthavā ||
ap25.­32
sidhyate tatkṣaṇaṃ yogī bhāvanāpariniṣṭhitaḥ |
evaṃ śvetācalādīṃś ca bhāvayed gāḍhayatnataḥ ||
ap25.­33
bījenāpi vinā dhyāyād ekacittasamāhitaḥ |
piban bhuñjan svapan tiṣṭhan gacchañ caṅkramann api ||
ap25.­34
sarvāvasthāsthito yogī bhāvayed devatākṛtim |
athavā kevalaṃ saukhyaṃ yoginīdvaṃdva430 nanditam ||
ap25.­35
tāvad vibhāvayed gāḍhaṃ yāvat sphuṭatāṃ vrajeta |
gate tu prasphuṭe yogī mahāmudreṇa sidhyati ||
ap25.­36
ity ekallavīrākhye śrīcaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantre devatā431 sādhanapaṭalaḥ pañcaviṃśatitamaḥ ||
idam avocad bhagavān śrīvajrasattvas te ca yogiyoginīgaṇā bhagavato bhāṣitam abhyanandann iti ||
ity ekallavīranāmacaṇḍamahāroṣaṇatantraṃ samāptam ||
ye dharmā hetuprabhavā hetuṃ teṣāṃ tathāgato hy avadat | teṣāṃ ca yo nirodha432 evaṃvādī mahāśramaṇaḥ433 ||

n.

Notes

n.­1
Cf. Dharmachakra (2016).
n.­2
Cf. Isaacson (2006).
n.­3
The seventeenth mantra; see Dharmachakra (2016).
n.­4
Cf. Isaacson (2010).
n.­5
The Tibetan Kangyur contains eight Caryātantras, Toh 494–501.
n.­6
Cf. Isaacson (2010).
n.­7
Chap. 16 in de la Vallée Poussin (1897), and chaps. 1–8 in George (1974).
n.­8
The palm leaf manuscript is held at the Royal Asiatic Society in London (ref. Cowell no. 46/31, dated Nepal Saṃvat 500, 1380 c.e.).
n.­36
Skt. oṁ caṇḍamahāroṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ.
n.­37
Skt. oṁ acala hūṁ phaṭ.
n.­38
Skt. oṁ hrāṁ hrīṁ hrauṁ caṇḍarūpe caṭa caṭa pracaṭa pracaṭa kaṭṭa kaṭṭa prasphura prasphura prasphāraya prasphāraya hana hana grasa grasa bandha bandha jambhaya jambhaya stambhaya stambhaya mohaya mohaya sarvaśatrūṇāṃ mukhabandhanaṃ kuru kuru sarvaḍākinīnāṃ graha­bhūta­piśāca­vyādhi­yakṣānāṃ trāsaya trāsaya mara mara māraya māraya rurucaṇḍaruk rakṣa rakṣa devadattaṃ caṇḍa­mahāsenaḥ sarvam ājñāpayati. oṁ caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa hūṁ phaṭ.
n.­66
Here the Tibetan reflects the reading rakta (rak+ta) rather than bhakta.
n.­132
Translation based on the Tibetan.
n.­146
Translation based on the Tibetan.
n.­158
The Tibetan adds a line: “If one rubs the penis with it and makes love, she will be enthralled.”
n.­225
Skt. oṁ caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa sarva­māyā­darśaka sarva­māyāṃ nidarśaya nirvighne hūṁ phaṭ.
n.­226
Translation based on the Tibetan.
n.­265
This sentence is missing from the Tibetan. Instead the Tibetan colophon reads: “Due to the Mahākālacakra master Sherab Senge’s request and sponsorship, which in turn was based on the kindness of the great master Rinchen Gyaltsen‍—the spiritual guide of the pure Mahāyāna with immeasurable knowledge, love, and activity‍—this was translated to completion on the tenth day of the waxing moon in the tenth month of the year of the Snake at the great temple of glorious Sakya, by the translator Trakpa Gyaltsen as based on the oral teachings of the paṇḍita Ratnaśrī.”
n.­266
tasyās tu] P; tasyāpi Mss.
n.­267
paṭu°] B; paṭṭa G.
n.­268
gaṇacakraṃ] B; bhakṣaṇacakraṃ G.
n.­269
dhyāyān] B; dhyāyen G.
n.­270
°puṇḍra° B, °kāṇṭa° G.
n.­271
svapneneva] G, (supported also by T); svapnenaiva A, B.
n.­272
Metrical shortening of °ātmakam.
n.­273
devadattaṃ] B; sarvaṃ G.
n.­274
mahāviṣa°] T; mahāviṣama° Mss.
n.­275
°valita°] B; balita G.
n.­276
°āgartaka] B; °āvartaka G.
n.­277
asamantika] B; asamantike G.
n.­278
sāṭaya] G; sātaya B.
n.­279
samānaya] B; samānāya G.
n.­280
sphāṭaya] B; sphoṭaya G.
n.­281
nirbharam] A; nirbharām G.
n.­282
vā] A; ceti G.
n.­283
bhīṣayan] A; bhīṣayet G.
n.­284
nāpi G; nadvi° (or naddhi°) B.
n.­285
atyantakāminām] A; abhyantakāminām G.
n.­286
saṃmukhīṃ] A; saṃmukhe G.
n.­287
Īkṣayet seems to be used here with a passive meaning (cf. Edgerton, Grammar, § 37.17).
n.­288
kheṭāsa°] A; kheṭasa° G.
n.­289
dattvocitālaye] A; dattvā cittālaye G.
n.­290
ānarghyam] G; ānarpyam A.
n.­291
upāgataḥ] A; upāgatam G.
n.­292
sampātya] A; sampāṭya G.
n.­293
tasyai] A; tasmai G.
n.­294
dolā°] Emended on the basis of subsequent spellings (dolācālanam) in manuscript A; dola° A, G.
n.­295
In manuscript A, this looks more °vāpitam than °cāpitam.
n.­296
bandhaḥ] A; bandha° G.
n.­297
°baddhaṃ] A; °bandhaṃ G.
n.­298
dolā°] em.; dola° A, G.
n.­299
dolā°] A; dola° G.
n.­300
vaktraṃ] A; vakraṃ G.
n.­301
°dbhūtām] A; °dbhavam G.
n.­302
idaṃ] A; iti G.
n.­303
°rajjuḥ] em.; °rājuḥ A; °rjuḥ G.
n.­304
°sītkṛtaiḥ] conj.; sotkṛtaiḥ A, P.
n.­305
dhyāyakaṃ] B, G; dhyayakaṃ A.
n.­306
śramaṃ jīrya tataḥ] A, B; śrame jīryati tat° G.
n.­307
icchāyatu] A; icchayātu B, icchayet tu G.
n.­308
samāhitam] A; samāhitaḥ G.
n.­309
tallavaṃ] P; tadevaṃ A.
n.­310
bhaktādiṃ] A; bhaktādi° G.
n.­311
tadutsṛṣṭaṃ] A; taducchiṣṭaṃ G.
n.­312
utsṛṣṭapattre] A; ucchiṣṭayantre G.
n.­313
guda°] G; gudapada° A.
n.­314
°bhāgena] A; °bhogena G.
n.­315
ca vāpāpaṃ ca] A; na ca vā pāpaṃ G.
n.­316
°yuto] A; yukto G.
n.­317
tad° A; tath° G.
n.­318
māraṇārthārthacintakāḥ] B, G; māraṇārtho 'rthacintakaḥ A.
n.­319
yogināṃ] A, B; yoginā G.
n.­320
śūdrī] A; śūdrā G.
n.­321
kāyasthī] A; kāyastrī G.
n.­322
ca tariṇī] G; cauriṇī (?) A.
n.­323
kulatriṇī] G; kuruttinī (?) A.
n.­324
nāpitī] A; nāpiṇī G.
n.­325
khaṭakī G; khādukī A.
n.­326
kāṇḍa°] G; kaṇḍa° A.
n.­327
°aiṣiṇām] G; °aiṣiṇīm A.
n.­328
MS “A” reads “yāvat.”.
n.­329
°prabhavam] conj.; °prabham A, G.
n.­330
vāme] em.; vāmo A.
n.­331
°svabhāvataḥ] em.; svabhāvata A.
n.­332
gatiḥ] em.; gatim Mss.
n.­333
sarvaṃ] conj.; sarvā A, B.
n.­334
vāpi] conj.; cāpi A, B.
n.­335
labhyate] conj.; labhya A, B.
n.­336
sulabhaṃ] conj. (on the authority of T); durlabhaṃ A.
n.­337
dūrasthasya] conj.; dūrastasya A.
n.­338
khaḍgapāśakarābhyāṃ] conj.; khaḍgasya svakarābhyāṃ A, B.
n.­339
sarva ājñāṃ] conj.; sarvājñāṃ A.
n.­340
°mayīṃ] em.; °mayaṃ A.
n.­341
lambāpayet] em.; lambāvayet A.
n.­342
°paṭalayor P, B; paṭayor A.
n.­343
nirmañcayitvā] em.; nimañcayitvā A .
n.­344
sarvavyādhiḍākinyādyupadrave ca balir deyaḥ] om. A.
n.­345
°saṃvare] em. (on the basis of T); °saṃvaraṃ Mss.
n.­346
'smin] conj. (based on T); caitat (unmetrical) Mss.
n.­347
parastrīharaṇaṃ naiva] om. T.
n.­348
The medial “m” is added for metrical reasons.
n.­349
varṇabhedopatis] The “upati” here must be a metri causa contraction of “upapati.”.
n.­350
ratnāder abhāvena] A; ratnādikaṃ sabhāvena….
n.­351
°ārthā° conj. (influenced by T); °ārdhā° A.
n.­352
°samayān] P; °samayāna A.
n.­353
dhanva° or dhandha°?.
n.­354
piṇḍayitvā] A; viśundhitvā Po.
n.­355
upādāna°] Po; upādānaṃ A.
n.­356
aduḥkhāsukhā] A; °sukhā.
n.­357
vastūnāṃ] A; vastunā Po.
n.­358
°bhilāpaḥ] conj. (on the authority of T); °bhilāṣaḥ A, Po.
n.­359
°grāhiṇaś] em.; °grāhiṇaḥ A; °gāhinaḥ Po.
n.­360
cittacaittā vijñānāni] em.; cittacaittāḥ vijñānāni A; cittacaittavijñānāni Po.
n.­361
kakkhaṭatvam] A; vākyaṃ tattvam Po.
n.­362
abhiṣyanditatvam] em.; abhisyanditatvam A; abhispanditvam Po.
n.­363
°prasāraṇa°] A; °prāsaraṇa° Po.
n.­364
yutā] conj.; yutaḥ A; yuktā Po.
n.­365
°samāpattiḥ] A; °samāvarttaye Po.
n.­366
tatprāpakaṃ] A; tataḥ prāpakaṃ Po.
n.­367
upādāna­pañca­skandha­lābhaḥ] A; upādānaṃ pañca­skandha­lābhaḥ Po.
n.­368
°cintayan] A; °cittaṃ yena Po.
n.­369
paryeṣiteti] A; praveśiteti Po.
n.­370
°upadrutaś] A; upadravataś Po.
n.­371
evaṃ] A; eva Po.
n.­372
yojayan] A; niyojanād Po.
n.­373
daurmanasyī] em.; daurmasyī A; daurmanasī Po.
n.­374
upadruta] A; upadravata Po.
n.­375
yaj°] A; 'yaṃ Po.
n.­376
sukhaduḥkhe] A; sukhaduḥkha° Po.
n.­377
aduḥkhāsukha°] Po (chosen on the authority of T); duḥkhāsukhā° A.
n.­378
kāmayate iti] A; kāmayatīti Po.
n.­379
tata] A; tatrā° Po.
n.­380
pañca°] A; pañca Po.
n.­381
duṣṭhu° A; duḥkhāḥ Po.
n.­382
pañca°] A; pañca Po.
n.­383
avidyādi°] A; avidyā° Po.
n.­384
skandhābhāvaḥ] A; pañcaskandhābhāvaḥ Po.
n.­385
roma°] A; roga° some Mss.
n.­386
aśva°] em.; akṣa° A.
n.­387
yaṣṭi°] Some Mss; jaṣṭi° A.
n.­388
strīmūtreṇa] Most Mss; strīsūtreṇa A.
n.­389
kāñjikena] om. A.
n.­390
kāṃse nighṛṣya mantraṃ] conj. (cf. CMT, chap. 18, v. 31); [[OK?]]kāṃsya nighṛghyāṃ Mss.
n.­391
dantakīṭako] conj. (on the authority of T); dantakaṭakaṭī A.
n.­392
ārdrakaṃ] conj. (based on T); madrakaṃ B.
n.­393
raktātisāra°] conj.; raktāsāra° B.
n.­394
°cūrṇaṃ] em.; °cūrṇa° Mss.
n.­395
brahmī°] conj.; brahma° B.
n.­396
The passage starting from °vāsakaṃ in the previous paragraph and ending with °harītakī° is missing from B.
n.­397
piṣṭvā] conj.; pītvā Mss.
n.­398
śuṇṭhīṃ] em.; śuṇṭhī° Mss.
n.­399
punarnava°] conj. (based on T); pulinava° B.
n.­400
aṅgulīṃ] em.; aṅgulī Mss.
n.­401
gaṇḍaḥ] em.; gaṇḍā Mss.
n.­402
snuhī°] conj. (on the authority of T); snehi° Mss.
n.­403
°madya°] conj.; °madyo Mss.
n.­404
°āva°] conj. based on the commentary; ca B.
n.­405
°āṅgī] conj.; °āṅgīṃ B.
n.­406
śvetagṛdhṛṇi] em.; śvetagriddhini T; śvetagṛṣiṇi gṛdhini B.
n.­407
ruṣaṃ ca] T; ruṣiṇi B.
n.­408
caurī na bhavati] A; caurībhavati B.
n.­409
°nigati°] A; °gaḍita° Mss.
n.­410
kuryāt] A; jayati Mss.
n.­411
trilohaṃ] Gt; lohaṃ B.
n.­412
Mā is here an abbreviation of māṣa and tī of raktī or rattī. The last two, probably derived from raktikā, are synonyms for guñjā.
n.­413
vidarbhitaṃ] em.; vidarbhita Mss.
n.­414
dhairyaśo] em.; dhairyaśa Mss.
n.­415
bhājanaṃ] em.; bhājana Mss.
n.­416
tyajeta] conj.; tyajita A.
n.­417
niścalaḥ] em.; niścalā A .
n.­418
kumbhakena] conj.; kumbhena (unmetrical) A.
n.­419
nāsy°] B; nasy° A.
n.­420
dṛṣṭir uccāṭanī] conj.; dṛṣṭi A.
n.­421
°samāgame G: °samāgamo B.
n.­422
This word is not the dictionary, but hañchi must be an onomatopeic for sneezing (cf. hañji).
n.­423
dehāpamārjana°] conj.; dehāya mārjana° A.
n.­424
nāsāgrādarśanāt] conj.; nāsāgradarśanāt A.
n.­425
vā] em.; vātha (unmetrical) A.
n.­426
nīlāṃ] em.; nīlā A.
n.­427
sarvāḥ] em.; sarvā A.
n.­428
rāmadevaṃ] conj. (on the authority of T and P); vāmavāmadevaṃ (unmetrical) A.
n.­429
vāme] conj. (on the authority of T); vātma A.
n.­430
yoginīdvaṃdva°] P; yogidvanda° (hypometrical) A.
n.­431
devatā°] em.; devatī° A.
n.­432
nirodha] B, P; nidha A.
n.­433
mahāśramaṇaḥ] P; mahāśravaṇaḥ A, B.

b.

Bibliography

Tibetan Manuscript of the Root Text

dpal gtum po khro bo chen po’i rgyud kyi rgyal po dpa’ bo gcig pa zhes bya ba. Toh 431, Degé Kangyur, vol. 80 (rgyud ’bum, nga), folios 304b–343a.

Sanskrit Manuscripts of the Root Text

Ekallavīra­nāma­caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantram. London: Royal Asiatic Society. Ref.: Cowell 46/31.

Ekallavīra­nāma­caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantram. Kathmandu: National Archives of Nepal. Ref.: NGMPP 3/687, Reel no. A 994/4.

Ekallavīra­tantram. Kathmandu: National Archives of Nepal. Ref.: NGMPP 5/170, Reel no. B 31/11.

Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantram. Göttingen: University of Göttingen Library. Ref.: Bandurski Xc 14/43–45.

Manuscripts of the Commentary

Mahāsukhavajra, Padmāvatī­nāmā Pañjikā. Kathmandu: National Archives of Nepal. Ref.: NGMPP 3/502, Reel no. B 31/7.

Secondary Sources

de la Vallée Poussin, Louis. “The Buddhist ‘Wheel of Life’ from a New Source.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland (New Series) 29, no. 3 (July 1897), pp 463–70.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee. The Tantra of Siddhaikavīra (Toh 544). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2016.

Gäng, Peter, trans. Das Tantra des Grausig-Groß-Schreklichen. Berlin: Stechapfel, 1981.

George, Christopher S., trans. and ed. The Caṇḍa­mahāroṣaṇa Tantra, Chapters I–VIII: A Critical Edition and English Translation. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society, 1974.

Isaacson, Harunaga (2010). The Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantra. Handout. Kathmandu: Rangjung Yeshe Institute, February 17, 2010.

Isaacson, Harunaga (2006). Reflections on the Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantra. Handout. Kathmandu: Nepal Research Centre, August 25, 2006.

Snellgrove, David. Hevajra Tantra: A Critical Study. London: Oxford University Press, 1959.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

absorption

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­9
  • 5.­1
  • 12.­4
  • 14.­13
  • 22.­9
  • 22.­12
  • 25.­12
g.­2

Acala

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • acala

Another name for Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa.

Located in 36 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • i.­5
  • 3.­16
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­5
  • 6.­11
  • 8.­37
  • 12.­14
  • 14.­1-2
  • 14.­4-5
  • 14.­15
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­12-14
  • 16.­20-22
  • 22.­29
  • 22.­31-32
  • 25.­5
  • 25.­16
  • n.­37
  • n.­39
  • g.­45
  • g.­115
  • g.­161
  • g.­166
  • g.­172
  • g.­330
  • g.­452
  • g.­467
g.­3

accomplishment

Wylie:
  • dngos grub
Tibetan:
  • དངོས་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhi

An accomplishment that is the goal of sādhana.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­7
  • 3.­24
  • 3.­28
  • 4.­48
  • 4.­50
  • 6.­70
  • 6.­79
  • 6.­92
  • 8.­13
  • 8.­22
  • 8.­34-35
  • 8.­40-41
  • 9.­8-9
  • 9.­16
  • 10.­3
  • 10.­6
  • 10.­19
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­7
  • 12.­5
  • 12.­14-15
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­14
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­21
  • 17.­3
  • n.­252
g.­6

Akṣobhya

Wylie:
  • mi bskyod pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་བསྐྱོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • akṣobhya

One of the five buddhas; in the system followed in the CMT, he is at the center of the maṇḍala.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­14-15
  • 4.­17
  • 4.­21
  • 6.­23
  • 15.­10
  • 25.­3
  • g.­45
  • g.­127
  • g.­253
  • g.­391
  • g.­460
g.­10

Amitābha

Wylie:
  • ’od dpag med
Tibetan:
  • འོད་དཔག་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • amitābha

One of the five buddhas.

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The buddha of the western buddhafield of Sukhāvatī, where fortunate beings are reborn to make further progress toward spiritual maturity. Amitābha made his great vows to create such a realm when he was a bodhisattva called Dharmākara. In the Pure Land Buddhist tradition, popular in East Asia, aspiring to be reborn in his buddha realm is the main emphasis; in other Mahāyāna traditions, too, it is a widespread practice. For a detailed description of the realm, see The Display of the Pure Land of Sukhāvatī, Toh 115. In some tantras that make reference to the five families he is the tathāgata associated with the lotus family.

Amitābha, “Infinite Light,” is also known in many Indian Buddhist works as Amitāyus, “Infinite Life.” In both East Asian and Tibetan Buddhist traditions he is often conflated with another buddha named “Infinite Life,” Aparimitāyus, or “Infinite Life and Wisdom,”Aparimitāyurjñāna, the shorter version of whose name has also been back-translated from Tibetan into Sanskrit as Amitāyus but who presides over a realm in the zenith. For details on the relation between these buddhas and their names, see The Aparimitāyurjñāna Sūtra (1) Toh 674, i.9.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 25.­8
  • n.­22
  • g.­127
  • g.­330
  • g.­378
  • g.­458
g.­11

Amoghasiddhi

Wylie:
  • don yod grub pa
Tibetan:
  • དོན་ཡོད་གྲུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • amoghasiddhi

One of the five buddhas.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 25.­9
  • g.­4
  • g.­127
  • g.­161
g.­15

apāna

Wylie:
  • thur sel
Tibetan:
  • ཐུར་སེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • apāna

One of the five vital airs, centered in the anus.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­1
g.­28

Avalokiteśvara

Wylie:
  • spyan ras gzigs
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་རས་གཟིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • avalokiteśvara

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the “eight close sons of the Buddha,” he is also known as the bodhisattva who embodies compassion. In certain tantras, he is also the lord of the three families, where he embodies the compassion of the buddhas. In Tibet, he attained great significance as a special protector of Tibet, and in China, in female form, as Guanyin, the most important bodhisattva in all of East Asia.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 12.­19
g.­39

betel

Wylie:
  • go la
Tibetan:
  • གོ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • tāmbūla

Piper betle.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­8
  • 12.­36
  • 19.­3
  • 19.­8
  • 19.­34
  • 21.­23
  • n.­159
g.­40

bhaga

Wylie:
  • bha ga
Tibetan:
  • བྷ་ག
Sanskrit:
  • bhaga

In this text, it mostly refers to the female sexual and reproductive organs, however, this terms encompasses several meanings, including “good fortune,” “happiness,” and “majesty”; and forms the root of the word bhagavān (Blessed One).

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 3.­26
  • 4.­15-16
  • 4.­49
  • 9.­19
  • 12.­53
g.­42

bhūta

Wylie:
  • ’byung po
Tibetan:
  • འབྱུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This term in its broadest sense can refer to any being, whether human, animal, or nonhuman. However, it is often used to refer to a specific class of nonhuman beings, especially when bhūtas are mentioned alongside rākṣasas, piśācas, or pretas. In common with these other kinds of nonhumans, bhūtas are usually depicted with unattractive and misshapen bodies. Like several other classes of nonhuman beings, bhūtas take spontaneous birth. As their leader is traditionally regarded to be Rudra-Śiva (also known by the name Bhūta), with whom they haunt dangerous and wild places, bhūtas are especially prominent in Śaivism, where large sections of certain tantras concentrate on them.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 12.­3
  • 12.­8
  • 12.­19
  • g.­43
g.­43

bhūtinī

Wylie:
  • ’byung mo
Tibetan:
  • འབྱུང་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūtinī

A female bhūta.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­3
g.­45

Black Acala

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo ba nag po
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བ་ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛṣṇācala

Acala corresponding to Buddha Akṣobhya in the center of the maṇḍala.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­6
  • 2.­15
  • 2.­20
  • 3.­16
  • 4.­36
  • 5.­5
  • 12.­13
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­8
g.­52

bodhisattva level

Wylie:
  • sa
Tibetan:
  • ས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūmi

Level of the realization of a bodhisattva; according to the general Mahāyāna, there are ten bodhisattva levels; according to Vajrayāna, thirteen.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­11
  • g.­7
  • g.­26
  • g.­35
  • g.­76
  • g.­116
  • g.­156
  • g.­172
  • g.­191
  • g.­197
  • g.­248
  • g.­300
  • g.­309
  • g.­332
  • g.­393
g.­57

butterfly pea

Wylie:
  • a pa ra dzi
  • a pa ra dzi ta dkar po
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་པ་ར་ཛི།
  • ཨ་པ་ར་ཛི་ཏ་དཀར་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • aparājitā
  • śvetāparajitā

Clitoria ternatea.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­18
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­11
  • n.­162
  • n.­176
g.­58

Calumny Vajrī

Wylie:
  • phra ma rdo rje ma
Tibetan:
  • ཕྲ་མ་རྡོ་རྗེ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • piśunavajrī

Consort of Yellow Acala.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­21
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­40
  • 5.­7
  • 8.­16
  • 12.­13
g.­61

Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa

Wylie:
  • gtum po khro bo chen po
  • gtum po khro bo
  • gtum po
Tibetan:
  • གཏུམ་པོ་ཁྲོ་བོ་ཆེན་པོ།
  • གཏུམ་པོ་ཁྲོ་བོ།
  • གཏུམ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa
  • caṇḍaroṣa
  • caṇḍa

The chief deity of the CMT.

Located in 133 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • i.­3-5
  • i.­11-12
  • i.­14
  • i.­17
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­10-11
  • 1.­19-20
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­26
  • 3.­13
  • 3.­16
  • 3.­19-20
  • 3.­29-30
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­31
  • 4.­51
  • 5.­1-2
  • 5.­4
  • 5.­8-9
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­60
  • 6.­70
  • 6.­78
  • 6.­88
  • 6.­93
  • 6.­96
  • 7.­11-12
  • 7.­16
  • 7.­20
  • 8.­34-35
  • 8.­37
  • 8.­40-42
  • 9.­6
  • 9.­22-23
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­17
  • 10.­40
  • 11.­11
  • 12.­10-11
  • 12.­15
  • 12.­21
  • 12.­43
  • 12.­52
  • 12.­56
  • 13.­10
  • 13.­34
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­15
  • 15.­16
  • 16.­23
  • 17.­12
  • 17.­49
  • 18.­54
  • 19.­41
  • 20.­9
  • 20.­11
  • 20.­16-22
  • 20.­24-25
  • 20.­38
  • 21.­1
  • 21.­50
  • 22.­9
  • 22.­11-12
  • 22.­33
  • 23.­8
  • 24.­5
  • 25.­12
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­32
  • 25.­37
  • 25.­39
  • n.­19
  • n.­38
  • n.­85
  • n.­107
  • n.­110
  • n.­113
  • n.­116
  • n.­188
  • n.­190
  • n.­197-201
  • n.­204
  • n.­207
  • n.­225
  • n.­262-263
  • g.­2
  • g.­32
  • g.­62
  • g.­122
  • g.­155
  • g.­172
  • g.­211
  • g.­224
  • g.­231
  • g.­286
  • g.­370
  • g.­419
g.­65

castor-oil plant

Wylie:
  • e raN+Da
Tibetan:
  • ཨེ་རཎྜ།
Sanskrit:
  • eraṇḍa

Ricinus communis.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­1
g.­66

Caurī

Wylie:
  • tsau ra
Tibetan:
  • ཙཽ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • caurī

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­18
  • n.­408
g.­75

clearing nut

Wylie:
  • ka Ta kaM
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ཊ་ཀཾ།
Sanskrit:
  • kataka

Strychnos potatorum.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 18.­3
  • 18.­5
g.­77

cluster fig

Wylie:
  • u dum bA ra
Tibetan:
  • ཨུ་དུམ་བཱ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • uḍumbara
  • udumbara

Ficus glomerata.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­2
g.­81

costus

Wylie:
  • ru rta
Tibetan:
  • རུ་རྟ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuṣṭha

Saussurea costus.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­28
  • 18.­10
  • 18.­46
  • 18.­50
  • 19.­3
  • 19.­13
  • 19.­27
  • n.­159
g.­90

ḍākinī

Wylie:
  • mkha’ ’gro ma
Tibetan:
  • མཁའ་འགྲོ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • ḍākinī

A class of female deities; a class of female nonhuman beings.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 6.­9
  • 12.­18
  • 12.­23
  • 12.­44
  • 20.­6
  • n.­91
g.­91

daṇḍa

Wylie:
  • dbyug gu
Tibetan:
  • དབྱུག་གུ
Sanskrit:
  • daṇḍa

A staff; punishment; the duration of a single breath (from the moment of inhalation until the moment of the next inhalation).

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­3
g.­94

Delusion Vajrī

Wylie:
  • gti mug rdo rje ma
Tibetan:
  • གཏི་མུག་རྡོ་རྗེ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • mohavajrī

Consort of White Acala.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­21
  • 2.­23
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­27
  • 4.­32
  • 4.­39
  • 5.­7
  • 8.­16
  • 12.­13
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­8
  • 15.­10
  • 25.­24
g.­101

driving away

Wylie:
  • skrod pa
Tibetan:
  • སྐྲོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • uccāṭana

A type of magical activity aiming to render a person homeless, or drive away non-human beings.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­1
g.­105

dūta

Wylie:
  • pho nya
Tibetan:
  • ཕོ་ཉ།
Sanskrit:
  • dūta

A class of nonhuman beings; the name literally means “messenger,” which could imply that these beings can be employed as messengers through magical rites.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­3
g.­111

emblic myrobalan

Wylie:
  • skyu ru ra
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱུ་རུ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • āmalakī

Phyllanthus emblica.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­36
  • 17.­39
  • 17.­44
  • 18.­3
  • 18.­14
  • 18.­50
  • 21.­45
g.­112

enriching

Wylie:
  • rgyas pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṣṭi
  • poṣaṇa
  • pauṣṭika

One of the four main types of enlightened activity.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­43
  • 12.­1
  • 22.­21
g.­113

enthralling

Wylie:
  • dbang ba
Tibetan:
  • དབང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaśya
  • vaśa
  • vaśīkaraṇa

One of the four main types of enlightened activity.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­43
  • 12.­1
  • 22.­21-22
  • g.­139
g.­114

enthrallment

Wylie:
  • dbang ba
Tibetan:
  • དབང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaśya
  • vaśa
  • vaśīkaraṇa

One of the four main types of enlightened activity.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­19
  • 12.­33
  • 12.­38
  • 17.­2
  • 19.­12
  • 19.­14-15
  • g.­12
  • g.­218
g.­115

Envy Vajrī

Wylie:
  • phrag dog rdo rje ma
Tibetan:
  • ཕྲག་དོག་རྡོ་རྗེ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • īrṣyāvajrī

Consort of Green ‌Acala.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­21
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­34
  • 4.­41
  • 5.­7
  • 8.­17
  • 12.­13
g.­117

false black pepper

Wylie:
  • byi tang ka
  • bi DaM ga
Tibetan:
  • བྱི་ཏང་ཀ
  • བི་ཌཾ་ག
Sanskrit:
  • viḍaṅga

Embelia ribes, or Embelia tsjeriam-cottam.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 18.­21
  • 19.­3
  • 19.­13
g.­119

fast

Wylie:
  • gso sbyong
Tibetan:
  • གསོ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • poṣadha

A ritual observance involving fasting.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­2
  • 3.­6
  • 3.­8
g.­120

female hell-being

Wylie:
  • dmyal ba mo
Tibetan:
  • དམྱལ་བ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārakī

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­4
g.­121

female hungry ghost

Wylie:
  • yi dwags mo
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དྭགས་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pretikā

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­4
g.­127

five buddhas

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas lnga
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcabuddha

The five, in the CMT system, are Akṣobhya (in the centre), Vairocana (in the east), Ratnasambhava (in the south), Amitābha (in the west), and Amoghasiddhi (in the north).

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­16
  • 25.­17
  • g.­6
  • g.­10
  • g.­11
  • g.­326
  • g.­391
  • g.­416
g.­128

five disciplines

Wylie:
  • bslab pa lnga
Tibetan:
  • བསླབ་པ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcaśikṣā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Refers to the five fundamental precepts of abstaining from killing, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and consuming intoxicants.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­2
  • 3.­5
g.­129

five empowerments

Wylie:
  • dbang lnga
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcābhiṣeka

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­2
g.­141

four joys

Wylie:
  • dga’ bzhi
  • dga’ ba bzhi
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བཞི།
  • དགའ་བ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturānandāḥ

The four types of bliss arising during sexual intercourse, the full understanding of which leads to liberation.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­14
  • i.­23
  • 1.­2
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­30
  • 10.­5
  • 14.­8
  • 16.­20
  • g.­195
g.­149

gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of generally benevolent nonhuman beings who inhabit the skies, sometimes said to inhabit fantastic cities in the clouds, and more specifically to dwell on the eastern slopes of Mount Meru, where they are ruled by the Great King Dhṛtarāṣṭra. They are most renowned as celestial musicians who serve the gods. In the Abhidharma, the term is also used to refer to the mental body assumed by sentient beings during the intermediate state between death and rebirth. Gandharvas are said to live on fragrances (gandha) in the desire realm, hence the Tibetan translation dri za, meaning “scent eater.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­18
  • 24.­3
  • g.­150
g.­150

gandharvī

Wylie:
  • dri za mo
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharvī

Female gandharva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­4
g.­151

garland mantra

Wylie:
  • phreng ba’i sngags
Tibetan:
  • ཕྲེང་བའི་སྔགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mālāmantra

A mantra that surrounds the central item in a diagram or magical drawing.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • i.­21
  • 5.­2-4
  • 5.­6
  • 12.­42
  • 12.­44-46
  • 12.­54-55
  • 20.­17
  • 20.­22
  • 20.­26
  • 21.­32
  • n.­236
g.­155

Goddess of the Vajra Realm

Wylie:
  • rdo rje dbyings kyi dbang phyug ma
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་དབྱིངས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajra­dhātvīśvarī

Consort of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa. See also “Vajra realm.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­4
  • 16.­15
g.­158

graha

Wylie:
  • gza’
Tibetan:
  • གཟའ།
Sanskrit:
  • graha

Eclipse; a class of spirits causing possession.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 12.­8
g.­161

Green Acala

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo ba ljang gu
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བ་ལྗང་གུ
Sanskrit:
  • śyāmācala

Acala corresponding to Buddha Amoghasiddhi in the north of the maṇḍala.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­20
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­34
  • 4.­38
  • 5.­5
  • 8.­39
  • 12.­13
g.­162

guñjā

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • guñjā

A unit of weight equal to about 125 milligrams, or one eighth of a māṣa.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­35
  • n.­239
  • n.­412
g.­166

Hatred Vajrī

Wylie:
  • zhe sdang rdo rje ma
Tibetan:
  • ཞེ་སྡང་རྡོ་རྗེ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • dveṣavajrī

Consort of Black ‌Acala.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 1.­6
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­21
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­30
  • 4.­18
  • 4.­39
  • 5.­7
  • 8.­15
  • 12.­13
  • 13.­6
  • 15.­2
  • 25.­22
g.­168

heart mantra

Wylie:
  • snying po’i sngags
Tibetan:
  • སྙིང་པོའི་སྔགས།
Sanskrit:
  • hṛdayamantra

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­1
  • 12.­41
g.­169

hell being

Wylie:
  • dmyal ba pa
Tibetan:
  • དམྱལ་བ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāraka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings. Birth in hell is considered to be the karmic fruition of past anger and harmful actions. According to Buddhist tradition there are eighteen different hells, namely eight hot hells and eight cold hells, as well as neighboring and ephemeral hells, all of them tormented by increasing levels of unimaginable suffering.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­3
g.­171

hungry ghost

Wylie:
  • yi dwags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དྭགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance. Detailed descriptions of their realm and experience, including a list of the thirty-six classes of pretas, can be found in The Application of Mindfulness of the Sacred Dharma, Toh 287, 2.­1281– 2.1482.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­3
  • g.­306
g.­172

Immovable

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • acalā

The eighth bodhisattva level; see also Acala (the masculine form), another name of the deity Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 13.­32
  • 14.­1
  • n.­246
  • n.­250
g.­187

Indra

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The lord of the Trāyastriṃśa heaven on the summit of Mount Sumeru. As one of the eight guardians of the directions, Indra guards the eastern quarter. In Buddhist sūtras, he is a disciple of the Buddha and protector of the Dharma and its practitioners. He is often referred to by the epithets Śatakratu, Śakra, and Kauśika.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­93
  • 12.­18
  • g.­338
  • g.­342
  • g.­423
g.­195

joy

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ānanda

Joy in general; the first of the four joys of sexual experience.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­3
  • 4.­29
  • 14.­7
  • n.­131
  • g.­140
  • g.­189
  • g.­196
  • g.­383
g.­208

killing

Wylie:
  • gsad pa
Tibetan:
  • གསད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • māraṇa

One of the four main types of enlightened activity.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­5
  • 4.­43
  • 7.­19
  • 12.­1
  • 22.­21
  • 22.­23
  • g.­139
g.­209

kinnara

Wylie:
  • mi’am ci
Tibetan:
  • མིའམ་ཅི།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnara

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that resemble humans to the degree that their very name‍—which means “is that human?”‍—suggests some confusion as to their divine status. Kinnaras are mythological beings found in both Buddhist and Brahmanical literature, where they are portrayed as creatures half human, half animal. They are often depicted as highly skilled celestial musicians.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • g.­210
g.­210

kinnarī

Wylie:
  • mi ’am ci mo
Tibetan:
  • མི་འམ་ཅི་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnarī

A female kinnara.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­3
g.­226

long pepper

Wylie:
  • pi pi ling
Tibetan:
  • པི་པི་ལིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pippalī

Piper longum.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­44
  • 18.­3
  • 18.­14
  • 18.­34-35
  • 18.­38
  • 19.­27
  • g.­397
g.­228

lotus

Wylie:
  • pad+ma
Tibetan:
  • པདྨ།
Sanskrit:
  • padma

The lotus flower or plant; euphemistic name for the female genital organ.

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • i.­18
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­11
  • 2.­13
  • 3.­28-29
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­13
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­49
  • 6.­1
  • 6.­21
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­28-30
  • 6.­45
  • 6.­54
  • 6.­67
  • 6.­70
  • 6.­74-75
  • 6.­81
  • 6.­85
  • 6.­87
  • 6.­95
  • 7.­4
  • 8.­12
  • 8.­24
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­28
  • 12.­24
  • 12.­54
  • 14.­3
  • 15.­8-9
  • 15.­12
  • 16.­15
  • 17.­22
  • 19.­4
  • 19.­25-26
  • 22.­27
  • 25.­3-4
  • 25.­15
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­32
  • n.­60
  • n.­67
  • n.­263
g.­241

Māra

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • māra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Māra, literally “death” or “maker of death,” is the name of the deva who tried to prevent the Buddha from achieving awakening, the name given to the class of beings he leads, and also an impersonal term for the destructive forces that keep beings imprisoned in saṃsāra:

(1) As a deva, Māra is said to be the principal deity in the Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations (paranirmitavaśavartin), the highest paradise in the desire realm. He famously attempted to prevent the Buddha’s awakening under the Bodhi tree‍—see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.1‍—and later sought many times to thwart the Buddha’s activity. In the sūtras, he often also creates obstacles to the progress of śrāvakas and bodhisattvas. (2) The devas ruled over by Māra are collectively called mārakāyika or mārakāyikadevatā, the “deities of Māra’s family or class.” In general, these māras too do not wish any being to escape from saṃsāra, but can also change their ways and even end up developing faith in the Buddha, as exemplified by Sārthavāha; see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.14 and 21.43. (3) The term māra can also be understood as personifying four defects that prevent awakening, called (i) the divine māra (devaputra­māra), which is the distraction of pleasures; (ii) the māra of Death (mṛtyumāra), which is having one’s life interrupted; (iii) the māra of the aggregates (skandhamāra), which is identifying with the five aggregates; and (iv) the māra of the afflictions (kleśamāra), which is being under the sway of the negative emotions of desire, hatred, and ignorance.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­9
  • 3.­17
  • 4.­20
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­8
  • 10.­27
  • 12.­6
  • 14.­11
  • 15.­11
  • 20.­15
g.­245

māṣa

Wylie:
  • ma Sha
Tibetan:
  • མ་ཥ།
Sanskrit:
  • māṣa

A unit of weight equal to 17 grains troy.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­35
  • n.­239
  • n.­412
  • g.­162
  • g.­403
g.­250

means

Wylie:
  • thabs
Tibetan:
  • ཐབས།
Sanskrit:
  • upāya

See “skillful means.”

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­23
  • 9.­1-2
  • 9.­17
  • 9.­19
  • 10.­34
  • 13.­23
  • 14.­9
  • 16.­20
  • 22.­27
  • 24.­2
  • n.­128
g.­255

moon

Wylie:
  • ri bong can
  • zla ba
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོང་ཅན།
  • ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śaśin
  • candra

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­14
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­13
  • 6.­84
  • 6.­86
  • 12.­9-10
  • 12.­16
  • 12.­19
  • 12.­45
  • 14.­3
  • 15.­8-9
  • 15.­12
  • 19.­8
  • 19.­11
  • 21.­26
  • 21.­30
  • 21.­35
  • 22.­13
  • 24.­1-2
  • 24.­4
  • 25.­4
  • 25.­18
  • 25.­21
  • n.­131
  • n.­238
  • n.­247
  • n.­265
g.­264

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga

A class of nonhuman beings, half-human and half-snake.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­92
  • 12.­18
  • 12.­39
  • g.­13
  • g.­266
  • g.­431
  • g.­434
g.­266

nāginī

Wylie:
  • klu mo
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāginī
  • nāgī

Female nāga.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­3
  • 12.­18
g.­278

oleogum resin

Wylie:
  • spos dkar
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་དཀར།
Sanskrit:
  • sarjarasa

Vateria indica.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­33
  • 21.­2
g.­279

one-pointed mind

Wylie:
  • yid rtse gcig
Tibetan:
  • ཡིད་རྩེ་གཅིག
Sanskrit:
  • ekāgracitta

The mind focused one-pointedly.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­24
  • 6.­2
  • 6.­31
  • 9.­1
  • 25.­12
g.­282

pacifying

Wylie:
  • zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śānti
  • śāntika

Peace; one of the four main types of enlightened activity.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­1
  • 22.­21
g.­287

Passion Vajrī

Wylie:
  • ’dod chags rdo rje ma
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་ཆགས་རྡོ་རྗེ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • rāgavajrī

Consort of Red Acala.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­21
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­40
  • 5.­7
  • 8.­17
  • 12.­13
  • 25.­21
g.­290

penis

Wylie:
  • ling ga
  • rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • ལིང་ག
  • རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • liṅga
  • vajra

Liṅga and vajra have many other meanings (too many to list here).

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • i.­14
  • 9.­19
  • 12.­47
  • 17.­1
  • 17.­14
  • 17.­17-20
  • 17.­24-25
  • 17.­28
  • 18.­52-53
  • 19.­2
  • 19.­4
  • 19.­7
  • 19.­16
  • 19.­18
  • 19.­27-29
  • 19.­31-33
  • 19.­37
  • 20.­26
  • n.­142
  • n.­158
  • g.­399
g.­291

Perfection of Wisdom

Wylie:
  • shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin ma
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་རབ་ཀྱི་ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • prajñāpāramitā

The perfection of wisdom personified.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­17
  • 7.­15
  • 8.­14
  • 8.­35
  • 9.­5
  • 10.­11
  • 13.­28
  • 25.­1-2
g.­296

piśāca

Wylie:
  • sha za
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • piśāca

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that, like several other classes of nonhuman beings, take spontaneous birth. Ranking below rākṣasas, they are less powerful and more akin to pretas. They are said to dwell in impure and perilous places, where they feed on impure things, including flesh. This could account for the name piśāca, which possibly derives from √piś, to carve or chop meat, as reflected also in the Tibetan sha za, “meat eater.” They are often described as having an unpleasant appearance, and at times they appear with animal bodies. Some possess the ability to enter the dead bodies of humans, thereby becoming so-called vetāla, to touch whom is fatal.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 12.­18
g.­302

prāṇa

Wylie:
  • srog rlung
Tibetan:
  • སྲོག་རླུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • prāṇa

Vital air in general, and also the vital air (one of the five) centered around the heart.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­9
  • 19.­19
  • 22.­1-2
  • 22.­6
  • 22.­20
  • 22.­26
  • 22.­33
  • g.­27
  • g.­68
  • g.­221
  • g.­323
g.­318

rākṣasa

Wylie:
  • srin po
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that are often, but certainly not always, considered demonic in the Buddhist tradition. They are often depicted as flesh-eating monsters who haunt frightening places and are ugly and evil-natured with a yearning for human flesh, and who additionally have miraculous powers, such as being able to change their appearance.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­18
  • n.­90
  • g.­319
g.­319

rākṣasī

Wylie:
  • srin mo
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasī

A female rākṣasa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­3
g.­326

Ratnasambhava

Wylie:
  • rin chen ’byung gnas
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་འབྱུང་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnasambhava

One of the five buddhas.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 25.­7
  • g.­127
  • g.­235
  • g.­459
  • g.­467
g.­327

Raurava Hell

Wylie:
  • ngu ’bod
Tibetan:
  • ངུ་འབོད།
Sanskrit:
  • raurava

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­3
g.­330

Red Acala

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo ba dmar po
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བ་དམར་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • raktācala

Acala corresponding to Buddha Amitābha in the west of the maṇḍala.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­20
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­33-34
  • 4.­38
  • 5.­5
  • 8.­39
  • 12.­13
  • n.­35
  • g.­287
g.­335

root mantra

Wylie:
  • rtsa ba’i sngags
Tibetan:
  • རྩ་བའི་སྔགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mūlamantra

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­1
  • 5.­6
  • 12.­5
  • 12.­41
  • 12.­44
  • 12.­46-47
  • 12.­53
  • n.­115
g.­336

Rurucaṇḍaruk

Wylie:
  • ru ru caN+Da ru ka
Tibetan:
  • རུ་རུ་ཅཎྜ་རུ་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • rurucaṇḍaruk

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • n.­38
g.­340

sādhana

Wylie:
  • sgrub thabs
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲུབ་ཐབས།
Sanskrit:
  • sādhana

Practice involving mantra and visualization.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­12
  • i.­15
  • 6.­9
  • 12.­3
  • 12.­9-10
  • g.­3
  • g.­93
  • g.­339
  • g.­390
g.­343

samāna

Wylie:
  • mnyam gnas
Tibetan:
  • མཉམ་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • samāna

One of the five vital airs, centered in the navel area.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­1
g.­344

Samantabhadra

Wylie:
  • kun tu bzang po
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantabhadra

A Buddhist deity; the name of a bodhisattva; also the name of the deity asking Vajrasattva questions at the time of the delivery of the CMT.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­1
  • 14.­6
g.­346

saṃbhogakāya

Wylie:
  • longs sbyod rdzogs pa’i sku
Tibetan:
  • ལོངས་སྦྱོད་རྫོགས་པའི་སྐུ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃbhogakāya

The “body of bliss,” one of the three (sometimes four) bodies of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 9.­3
g.­348

saṃkrānti

Wylie:
  • ’pho ba
Tibetan:
  • འཕོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃkrānti

Unit of time related to the counting of breath.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­3
g.­352

sattvaparyaṅka posture

Wylie:
  • sems dpa’i dkyil krung
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་དཔའི་དཀྱིལ་ཀྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sattvaparyaṅka

Sitting posture when the right shank is placed on top of the left shank; there is also a standing version of this posture.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­80
  • 12.­15
  • 14.­3
  • 25.­2
  • 25.­9
g.­355

seed

Wylie:
  • sa bon
Tibetan:
  • ས་བོན།
Sanskrit:
  • bīja

Seed of a plant; the syllable from which a deity manifests.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­4
  • 4.­13
  • 12.­23
  • 12.­25
  • 12.­43
  • 12.­49
  • 17.­22
  • 17.­42
  • 18.­10
  • 18.­16
  • 18.­19
  • 18.­41-42
  • 18.­49
  • 19.­22
  • 19.­32
  • 19.­39
  • 21.­24
  • 21.­27
  • 21.­32-35
  • 21.­43
  • 21.­47
  • 25.­34
  • n.­236
g.­356

semen

Wylie:
  • shu kra
  • khu ba
Tibetan:
  • ཤུ་ཀྲ།
  • ཁུ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śukra

The word śukra may also refer to the female sexual fluid.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • i.­14
  • 3.­19
  • 4.­16
  • 6.­70
  • 6.­74
  • 9.­18
  • 9.­20
  • 13.­24
  • 15.­8-9
  • 16.­15
  • 16.­17
  • 17.­1-2
  • 17.­12
  • 17.­35
  • 17.­49
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­4-5
  • 19.­18-27
  • 19.­30
  • 19.­41
  • 20.­27
  • n.­60-61
  • n.­131
  • n.­164
  • n.­170
  • n.­175
g.­360

siddha

Wylie:
  • grub thob
Tibetan:
  • གྲུབ་ཐོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddha

An accomplished being; a class of semidivine beings.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­3
  • 12.­8
  • n.­24
  • n.­82
g.­365

six cognitive fields

Wylie:
  • skye mched drug
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད་དྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • ṣaḍāyatana

Each field comprises one of the six senses with its respective sense-consciousness and the range of objects accessible to it.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­2-3
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­13
g.­369

skillful means

Wylie:
  • thabs
Tibetan:
  • ཐབས།
Sanskrit:
  • upāya

Also refers to the male partner in sexual yoga.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­17
  • 7.­13
  • 14.­1
  • 15.­11
  • g.­250
g.­370

Sole Hero

Wylie:
  • dpa’ bo gcig pa
Tibetan:
  • དཔའ་བོ་གཅིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ekallavīra

Another name for Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa; he is called “sole” because, apart from his consort, he is not accompanied by the deities of the maṇḍala.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­7
  • 10.­40
  • 12.­13
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­10
  • 15.­1
  • 25.­14
g.­371

sour gruel

Wylie:
  • rang skyur
Tibetan:
  • རང་སྐྱུར།
Sanskrit:
  • kāñjika

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­40
  • 18.­1
  • 18.­5
  • 18.­24
  • 18.­30
  • 18.­42
  • 21.­8
g.­381

sun

Wylie:
  • nyi ma
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūrya

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­14
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­14
  • 12.­19
  • 12.­50
  • 14.­3
  • 15.­8-9
  • 15.­12
  • 20.­34
  • 21.­35
  • 22.­13
  • 24.­1-2
  • 25.­17
  • 25.­25
  • n.­238
  • n.­247
  • n.­260
g.­386

sweet flag

Wylie:
  • shu dag
Tibetan:
  • ཤུ་དག
Sanskrit:
  • vacā

Acorus calamus.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­17
  • 17.­28
  • 18.­3
  • 18.­34-35
  • 19.­2-3
g.­394

three abodes

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten gsum po
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གསུམ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhuvanatraya

The three realms of existence, namely the desire, the form, and the formless.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­2
g.­400

tilak

Wylie:
  • thig le
Tibetan:
  • ཐིག་ལེ།
Sanskrit:
  • tilaka

A mark between the eyebrows, usually made with vermillion.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 19.­1
  • 19.­5
  • 19.­15
  • n.­161
g.­405

triple refuge

Wylie:
  • skyabs su ’gro ba gsum
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱབས་སུ་འགྲོ་བ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • triśaraṇa

Refuge taken in the Buddha, his teaching, and the assembly of followers.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­2
  • 3.­4
  • 4.­6
g.­406

tubeflower

Wylie:
  • brah+ma daN+Da
Tibetan:
  • བྲཧྨ་དཎྜ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmayaṣṭī
  • brahmadaṇḍa
  • bhārṅgī

Clerodendrum indicum (Clerodendron siphonanthus).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 19.­2-3
g.­408

turmeric

Wylie:
  • yung ba
Tibetan:
  • ཡུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • haridrā

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 18.­3
  • 18.­23
  • 21.­21
g.­412

udāna

Wylie:
  • gyen rgyu
Tibetan:
  • གྱེན་རྒྱུ།
Sanskrit:
  • udāna

One of the five vital airs, centered in the throat.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­1
g.­416

Vairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang mdzad
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • vairocana

One of the five buddhas; in the system followed in the CMT, he is in the eastern quarter of the maṇḍala.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­22
  • 25.­7
  • g.­127
  • g.­253
  • g.­452
g.­417

vajra

Wylie:
  • rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajra

A ritual sceptre; thunderbot; a diamond; a general term denoting an indestructible non-dual state.

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • i.­18
  • 1.­1
  • 2.­6-7
  • 2.­9
  • 4.­8
  • 4.­41
  • 4.­48
  • 6.­1
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­28-30
  • 6.­45
  • 6.­54
  • 6.­82
  • 6.­85
  • 7.­16
  • 8.­12
  • 8.­24
  • 9.­16
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­28
  • 12.­17
  • 14.­1
  • 16.­15
  • 20.­4
  • 20.­21
  • 20.­25
  • 22.­27
  • 25.­23
  • g.­99
  • g.­290
g.­418

Vajra realm

Wylie:
  • rdo rje dbyings
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་དབྱིངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vajradhātu

The experiential sphere of nonduality.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • g.­155
g.­419

Vajra­dhātvīśvarī

Wylie:
  • rdo rje dbyings kyi dbang phyug ma
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་དབྱིངས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajra­dhātvīśvarī

Consort of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • i.­17
  • 25.­7
  • 25.­13
  • n.­255
g.­423

Vajrapāṇi

Wylie:
  • phyag na rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱག་ན་རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrapāṇi

Wrathful aspect of Vajrasattva; the Buddhist counterpart of Indra.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 6.­93
  • 12.­19
g.­426

Vajrasattva

Wylie:
  • rdo rje sems dpa’
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་སེམས་དཔའ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrasattva

The deity delivering the CMT.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 1.­1-2
  • 14.­2
  • 22.­28
  • 25.­38
  • g.­344
  • g.­423
g.­437

vernonia

Wylie:
  • daN+Da ut+pal
Tibetan:
  • དཎྜ་ཨུཏྤལ།
Sanskrit:
  • daṇḍotpala

Vernonia cinerea.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­29
  • 19.­3
  • 19.­12
  • 19.­15
  • n.­159
  • g.­33
g.­446

vyādhi

Wylie:
  • nad
Tibetan:
  • ནད།
Sanskrit:
  • vyādhi

Disease or sickness; also a class of mischievous spirits.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­2
g.­447

vyāna

Wylie:
  • khyab byed
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱབ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vyāna

One of the five vital airs, diffused throughout the entire body.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­1
g.­452

White Acala

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo ba gkar po
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བ་གཀར་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śvetācala

Acala corresponding to Buddha Vairocana in the east of the maṇḍala.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­23
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­32
  • 4.­37
  • 5.­5
  • 8.­38
  • 12.­13
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­8
  • 15.­10
  • 25.­33
  • g.­94
g.­456

wisdom

Wylie:
  • shes rab
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • prajñā

In specific contexts, it refers also to the female partner in sexual yoga.

Located in 50 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­23
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­19
  • 3.­23
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­30
  • 4.­8
  • 4.­26
  • 5.­6
  • 6.­75
  • 8.­18
  • 9.­1-2
  • 9.­17
  • 9.­19
  • 10.­34
  • 12.­15
  • 13.­20
  • 13.­23
  • 13.­29-30
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­3
  • 14.­9
  • 14.­14
  • 15.­3-4
  • 15.­9
  • 15.­11
  • 16.­20
  • 16.­22
  • 22.­10
  • 22.­27
  • 24.­2
  • 25.­32
  • n.­263
  • g.­4
  • g.­229
  • g.­239
  • g.­253
  • g.­291
  • g.­350
  • g.­367
  • g.­409
  • g.­410
  • g.­428
  • g.­458
  • g.­459
  • g.­460
g.­461

yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 12.­8
  • 12.­12
  • 12.­17
  • g.­462
g.­462

yakṣiṇī

Wylie:
  • gnod spyin mo
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྤྱིན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣiṇī

A female yakṣa.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­3
  • 12.­3
  • 12.­12
  • 12.­18
  • g.­164
g.­466

yantra

Wylie:
  • ’khrul ’khor
Tibetan:
  • འཁྲུལ་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • yantra

A magical diagram; any mechanical tool or device.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­1
  • 20.­6
  • 20.­18
  • 20.­38
g.­467

Yellow Acala

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo ba ser po
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བ་སེར་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pītācala

Acala corresponding to Buddha Ratnasambhava in the south of the maṇḍala.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­23
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­32-33
  • 4.­37
  • 5.­5
  • 8.­38
  • 12.­13
  • g.­58
0
    You are downloading:

    The Tantra of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The Tantra of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa (Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantram, khro bo chen po’i rgyud, Toh 431). Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh431/UT22084-080-015-appendix.Copy
    84000. The Tantra of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa (Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantram, khro bo chen po’i rgyud, Toh 431). Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh431/UT22084-080-015-appendix.Copy
    84000. (2025) The Tantra of Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa (Caṇḍa­mahā­roṣaṇa­tantram, khro bo chen po’i rgyud, Toh 431). (Dharmachakra Translation Committee, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh431/UT22084-080-015-appendix.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from Unexcelled Yoga tantras
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy